CFX-Post

Notice This document and the CFX software products described or referred to in it are confidential and proprietary products of AEA Technology plc. or its licensors. They are provided under, and are subject to, the terms and conditions of a written license agreement between AEA Technology plc. or its licensors, and their customers, and must not be transferred, disclosed or otherwise provided to third parties unless otherwise permitted by that agreement. CFX is a registered trademark of AEA Technology plc. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. MSC MSC/PATRAN AVS/EXPRESS and all other trademarks and service marks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 1996-2002 by AEA Technology plc. All rights reserved. AEA Technology Engineering Software Ltd CFX International The Gemini Building, Fermi Avenue Harwell International Business Centre Didcot Oxfordshire OX11 OQR United Kingdom Website: http://www.software.aeat.com/cfx Any enquiries regarding copyright should be directed to CFX International at the address shown above, or by e-mail to cfx.support@cfx.aeat.com.

CFX-Post

1-CFX-Post

CFX-Post
Contents
Overview of CFX-Post Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Graphic Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 The Graphical User Interface (GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Starting CFX-Post from the command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 The CFX-Post Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 File Menu Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 CFX-Post File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 File Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Load Results File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Save State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Load State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Loading Recently Accessed Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Edit Menu Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Edit Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Undo and Redo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Session Menu Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Session Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Play Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 New Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Start and Stop Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Create Menu Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CFX-5.5.1

Contents

Page iii

CFX-Post

Viewer Menu

Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Isosurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Surface Group Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Contour Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Coordinate Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Clip Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Streamline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Instancing Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Wireframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Boundary and Subdomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Viewer Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Tools Menu CFX Command Language Overview of the CFX Command Language (CCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 CCL Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Simple Syntax Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Object Creation and Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 CFX Expression Language (CEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 CEL Functions, Constants and System Variables . . . . . . . . . . 174 Command Actions Overview of Command Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 File Operations from the Command Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
CFX-5.5.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mesh Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timestep Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114 115 116 124 127 138 141 148 149 151 157 158 162

Contents

Page iv

CFX-Post

Loading a Results File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Creating Session Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Reading Session Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Saving State Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Reading State Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Creating Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Importing External File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Function Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Power Syntax Power Syntax Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Examples of Power Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Predefined Power Syntax Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Line Interface Mode Line Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Example: Pressure Calculation on Multiple Files using Batch Mode 226 CCL Details CCL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 UNIT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 STREAMLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 ROOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 POINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 POLYLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 SUBDOMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 WIREFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 VECTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 SYMBOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 ISOSURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 USER SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 CLIP PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 VOLUME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 CONTOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 SURFACE GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 HARDCOPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 DATA READER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 SESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
CFX-5.5.1

Contents

Page v

CFX-Post

VIEWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 DOMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 VECTOR VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 SCALAR VARIABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 USER SCALAR VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 EXPRESSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ANIMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 KEYFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 DEFAULT INSTANCE TRANSFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 INSTANCE TRANSFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 REFLECTION PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 LEGEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 COORD FRAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 CHART LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 CALCULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 MESH CALCULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 EXPRESSION EVALUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 CCL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Absolute Tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Animate Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Animation Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Animation Frame Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Animation Hardcopy Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Animation Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Apply Instancing Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Apply Reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Apply Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Apply Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Axis 3 Point X Coord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Axis 3 Point Y Coord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Axis 3 Point Z Coord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Axis Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Background Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Base Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Border Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Bound Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Boundary List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Boundary Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Boundary Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Camera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Chart Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Chart Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Chart Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Chart Legend Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
CFX-5.5.1

Contents

Page vi

CFX-Post

CFX-5.5.1

Chart Line Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Chart Line List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Chart Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Chart Symbol Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Chart Symbol Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Chart Text Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Chart Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Chart Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Chart Viewport Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Chart X Axis Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Chart X Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Chart Y Axis Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Chart Y Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Clip Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Clip Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Colour Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Colour Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Colour Variable Boundary Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Component Bounds Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Component Clip Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Component Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Component Long Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Component Lower Bounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Component MMS Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Component Short Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Component Upper Bounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Constant Contour Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Contour Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Coord Frame Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Cross Periodics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Culling Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Current File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Current Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Current Results File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Current Results File Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Current Timestep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Current Timevalue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Custom Units Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Default Vulnerability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Direction 1 Bound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Direction 1 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Direction 1 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Direction 2 Bound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Direction 2 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Display Chart Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Display Chart Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Domain List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Contents
Page vii

CFX-Post

CFX-5.5.1

Draw Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Draw Faces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Draw Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Draw Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Draw Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Edge Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Evaluated Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Export File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Flip Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Frame Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Fringe Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Full Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 General Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Grid Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Hardcopy Filename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Hardcopy Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Hardcopy Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Has Hybrid Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 HybridMax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 HybridMin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Image Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Include Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Instancing Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Interface Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Intermediate File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Invert Plane Bound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Isovolume Intersection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 JPEG Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Keep Intermediate Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Keyframe Filename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Keyframe List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Keyframe Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Legend Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Legend Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Legend Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Legend Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Legend Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Legend Shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Legend Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Legend Ticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Legend X Justification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Legend Y Justification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Light Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Contents
Page viii

CFX-Post

CFX-5.5.1

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Line Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Line Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Line Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Line Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Load Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Location List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Long Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Looping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Looping Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 MMS Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 MPEG Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Max Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Max X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Max Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Member List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Mesh Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Min Result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Min X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Min Y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Node Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Normalized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Null Token. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Number Of Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Number of Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Number of Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Number of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Number of Hexahedra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Number of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Number of Pyramids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Number of Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Number of Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Number of Tetrahedra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Number of Wedges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Opposite Boundary List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Origin X Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Origin Y Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Origin Z Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Output to Jobfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Output to Postprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Overlay Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Overwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Contents
Page ix

CFX-Post

Page x

Paper Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Periodicity Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Physical Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Pivot Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Plane 13 Point X Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Plane 13 Point Y Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Plane 13 Point Z Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Plane Bound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Plane Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Playback Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Point 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Point 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Point 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Point Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Position Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Preferred Units System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Principal Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Print Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Projection Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Quantity Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Random Seed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Range Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Read State Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Recipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Reduction Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Reference Coord Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Reflection Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Result Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Ribbon Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Rotation Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Rotation Axis From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Rotation Axis To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Rotation Axis Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Rotation Quaternion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Save Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Save State Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Save State Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Screen Capture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
CFX-5.5.1

Contents

CFX-Post

CFX-5.5.1

Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Session Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Show Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Slice Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Solver Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Specular Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Standard View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 State Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Stream Ribbon Initial Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Streamline Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Streamline Maximum Periods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Streamline Maximum Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Streamline Maximum Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Streamline Solver Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Surface Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Surface Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Symbol Start Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Symbol Stop Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Symbol Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Symbol Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Temporary Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Tensor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Text Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Text Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Text Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Text String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Timestep Interpolation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Tolerance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Translation Vector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Tube Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Under Relaxation Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Update Units to Preferred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 User Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 User Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 User Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Value 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Value 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 VarMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 VarMin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Variable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Variable Boundary Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Variable Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Contents
Page xi

CFX-Post

Variable Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Variable Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Variable List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Variable Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Vector Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Vector Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Vector Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Verbose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Visibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Volume Intersection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 White Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Write Session Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 X Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Y Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

Page xii

Contents

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

Overview of CFX-Post
Introduction (p. 2) Functionality (p. 2) The Viewer (p. 3) Graphic Objects (p. 3) The Graphical User Interface (GUI) (p. 4) Starting CFX-Post from the command line p. 5 The CFX-Post Command Line (p. 7)

CFX-5.5.1

Page 1

CFX-Post Basics

Introduction
CFX-Post is a flexible state-of-the-art post-processor for CFX-5 and other CFX products. It is designed to allow easy visualisation and quantitative post-processing of the results of CFD simulations. This chapter of the documentation includes the following sections.
Functionality The Viewer Graphic Objects The Graphical User Interface (GUI)

Presentation of the abilities of CFX-Post Basic functions Planes, Vector Plots, Isosurfaces etc. An introduction to the Graphical User Interface

The CFX-Post Command Line How to access more functionality

Functionality
The current release of CFX-Post includes the core of the command processing, data handling and graphics generation capabilities of the post-processing engine. Additional functionality will be available in future releases of CFX-Post. Current functionality includes the following: Reads CFX-5.4, CFX-5.4.1, CFX-5.5, CFX-5.5.1 Definition (*.def) and Results (*.res) files and CFX-4 dump files (*.d*mp*). CFX-5.4.1 or later Results files are necessary to access some of the quantitative functionality. Command-line, session file or state file input through the CFX Command Language (CCL). Includes support for Power Syntax to allow fully programmable session files. Generates a variety of graphical and geometric objects. See Graphic Objects (p. 3) for the complete list. The following can be controlled on each graphics object:
Page 2

Visibility Transparency Colour (constant or coloured by any variable, with range control) Line/Face rendering
CFX-5.5.1

Introduction

CFX-Post Basics

User-defined variables. A variety of exact quantitative calculations over objects. See Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor (p. 201 in CFX-Post) for the complete list. Mesh Visualisation tools. Calculate a range of values to examine mesh quality and highlight problem areas. Transient Rotor/Stator support. Node locations are repositioned based on the position for the current timestep. This feature is demonstrated in the Axial tutorial. Please see Flow in an Axial Rotor/Stator Arrangement (p. 363 in CFX-5 Tutorials). Volume Object features. PlaneVolume, IsoVolume and SphereVolume objects are supported. Grouped surface objects can be created to apply consistent colour ranges to a group of objects. Solution units are imported from the solution, and can be modified locally. Partial integration with the CFX Expression Language (CEL). Hardcopy output to Postscript, JPEG, various bitmap formats and VRML. Standard interactive viewer controls (rotate, zoom, pan, zoom box) as well as predefined viewer camera control.

The Viewer
All graphical output from CFX-Post is plotted in the associated viewer window. The viewer that is used in CFX-Post is that same as the viewer used in CFX-TASCflow, and all mouse actions are the same as TASCflow. The mouse controls for the viewer are presented in Mouse Mapping (p. 28).

Graphic Objects
The CFX-Post processor supports a variety of graphical and geometric objects which are used to create post-processing plots, and define locations for quantitative calculation. The post-processor currently supports the following types of graphical objects:
CFX-5.5.1

Introduction

Page 3

CFX-Post Basics

Boundary Wireframe Plane - Full or bounded Vector Plot Isosurface Point Line Surface Group Plots - Colour a group of objects at the same time. Polyline - Read a line from an external data file, or create one by intersecting a boundary. Clip Plane - View a certain section of the geometry that lies on one side of a plane. User Surface - Read a faceted surface from an external data file or create one by intersecting a boundary. User Scalar Variables - Define your own new variables on the fly Legends Text - 2D or 3D text annotation Coordinate Frames - Used to define axes and directions for quantitative calculations The details of all the possible objects and associated parameters that can be defined in CFX-Post are described in a separate document CCL Content Definition for the CFX-Post processor. This document is provided in PDF format in the documentation subdirectory of CFX-Post export.

The Graphical User Interface (GUI)

The Graphical User Interface provides you with an easy way to access the functionality that CFX-Post has to offer. Most interaction with CFX-Post will be carried out using the GUI. The GUI acts as a layer that provides commands to the CFX-Post engine.
Page 4

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Basics

For information about specific menus and icons please choose a reference from the CFX-Post Basics (p. i) table of contents.

Starting CFX-Post from the command line

CFX-Post can be started from the command line by executing <CFXROOT/bin/5.5.1/cfx5post. There are a number of optional command line flags which are summarised in the table below:

Argument -batch <lename.cse> -gui -line -remote <host>

Alternative form

Usage Starts CFX-Post in batch mode, running the session le you enter as an argument Starts CFX-Post in graphical user interface (GUI) mode. Starts CFX-Post in line interface (CFX-Post command line) mode. See Line Interface Mode (p. 221) for more details. Specify a remote host to run on needed. This option also requires the -port and -viewerport options to be specied, and requires the host machine to be running CFX-Post with the -server option. For more details, please see the instructions below this table. Specify the port number for GUI-engine communication (used for -remote mode) Specify the port for the viewer (used for -remote mode).

-port <number> -viewerport <number> -graphics -cuedir <le> -t <le.cst> -s <le.cse> -server -v <resle> -gr

Specify the graphics system (options are ogl and mesa) Specify the lepath of the CFX-Post installation Start CFX-Post and load the state le <le.cst>. Start CFX-Post and load the session le <le.cse> Specify the current machine as a server. Please see below for more details Verbose dump environment Start CFX-Post and load the results le <resle>

CFX-5.5.1

Introduction

Page 5

CFX-Post Basics

CFX-Post can be run on a remote machine, and requires the following steps to run successfully. The host machine (server) must first be set up to run as a server. cfx5post -server The server machine will then produce output which will indicate how to connect to it from a guest machine (client).
Running CFX-Post engine in server mode. A remote GUI can now be connected to the engine by running: cfx5post -remote machine1 -port 35007 -viewerport 35008 Waiting for GUI connection...

The client machine operator (running on, for example, machine2) can then enter the following: cfx5post -remote machine1 -port 35007 -viewerport 35008 If the connection is successful, CFX-Post will start on the client machine and the message
Connection arrived from host machine2

will be displayed in the command window of the server machine. The machine name can be entered as an IP address (for example if you are not connecting across a local network). It is recommended that the host machine be of the same operating system type as the guest machine, although machines with the same byte ordering can be linked. For example, Intel and Alpha platforms which use little endian ordering can be linked, and Sun, SGI, IBM and HP which use big endian ordering can be linked.

Advanced Features
The advanced section of the CFX-Post documentation contains help on: CFX Command Language (CCL) - the internal command language used within CFX-Post. CCL is used to create objects or perform actions. Please see Overview of the CFX Command Language (CCL) (p. 164).
Page 6

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Basics

CFX Expression Language (CEL) - CEL is a powerful expression language used to create user-defined variables, expressions, etc). Please see CFX Expression Language (CEL) (p. 173). Power syntax - Power Syntax provides integration of the Perl programming language with CCL to allow creation of advanced subroutines. Please see Power Syntax Overview (p. 210). Line interface mode - Please see Line Interface Mode (p. 222). Some user interaction (for example with some advanced features) with the post-processor is through the CFX command line. This is denoted by the (CFX) > command line prompt. At the command line prompt the user can issue CFX Command Language (CCL) actions and issue a few command line specific commands. Batch Mode - CFX-Post can be run in batch mode (often using a session file as the basis for a series of actions which will be executed). For further details, please see Batch Mode (p. 226).

The CFX-Post Command Line

Some user interaction (for example with some advanced features) with the post-processor is through the CFX command line. This is denoted by the (CFX) > command line prompt. At the command line prompt the user can issue CFX Command Language (CCL) actions (Overview of Command Actions (p. 186 in CFX-Post)), create CCL objects (CCL Objects (p. 230 in CFX-Post)), and issue a few command line specific commands. By default, any entry on the command line is assumed to be a CCL action, and is immediately processed by CFX-Post.The table below provides a complete list of special commands that are accepted by the post-processor, but are not actually CCL actions. Please refer to Command Actions (p. 185) for information on CCL actions that can be used on the command line.
Action (Abbreviation) help (h) Arguments Behaviour Lists all valid command-line and CCL actions.

none

CFX-5.5.1

Introduction

Page 7

CFX-Post Basics

Action (Abbreviation) getstate (s)

Arguments <Object Name>

Behaviour Without an argument, lists all currently dened objects. With an argument, shows details of the denition of the named object. Enters CCL Object denition mode. Allows the user to type CCL object denitions. Ctrl-e processes the object denition, Ctrl-x aborts. Executes a Power Syntax (Perl) command Executes a system command (Unix Only)

enterccl (e)

none

! %

<command> <command>

Since a full post-processing session may require a large amount of typing, and because of the flexibility of the CCL Power Syntax, it is expected that most input to the post-processor will be via session files. A session file can be specified at start-up via the -session <filename> option, or on the post-processor command line using the readsession command (see Reading Session Files (p. 191)).

Page 8

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

File Menu
Introduction p. 10 Load Results File p. 13 Save State p. 14 Load State p. 15 Export p. 16 Print p. 21 Loading Recently Accessed Files p. 22 Quit p. 23

CFX-5.5.1

Page 9

CFX-Post File Menu

Introduction
The options available from the File menu are outlined below with a summary of the function performed by each option.
Load Results File

Loads a CFX results file (*.res), Definition file (*.def) Transient File (*.trn) CFX-4 dump file (*.d*mp*) or backup file (*.bak) into CFX-Post. See Load Results File (p. 13). Load a State file (*.cst) into CFX-Post. See Load State (p. 15). Save the current settings to the existing State file (*.cst). See Save State (p. 14). Save the current settings to a new State file (*.cst). See Save State (p. 14). Export results to a data file. See Export (p. 16). Enables you to print the image shown in the Viewport to a file. See Print (p. 21).

Load State Save State Save State As Export Print

Recent Results files Load a recently used results file. Recent State Files

Load a recently used state file.

Recent Session files Load a recently used session file. Quit

Exit CFX-Post. See Quit (p. 23).

CFX-Post File Types

This section describes the file types used and produced by CFX-Post. CFX-5 Results File A CFX-5 Results File is produced by the CFX-5 Solver and is associated with a .res file extension. It contains the mesh and the results from a simulation. Results files from CFX-5.4 or later can be read into CFX-Post, however some quantitative functionality is only available with CFX-5.4.1 or later Results files. CFX-5 Definition File A CFX-5 Definition File is produced by CFX-Build and contains the mesh which can be visualised in CFX-Post. Definition files from CFX-5.4 or later are supported in CFX-Post.
Page 10

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post File Menu

CFX-4 Results file CFX-Post can load dump files (*.d*mp*) created by CFX-4. There are some important limitations with CFX-4 results files which should be noted. The CFX-4 Solver does not output min/max ranges for each of the calculated variables. These ranges are calculated when the results file is loaded by CFX-Post. Calculating the range for a very large problem would, however, require prohibitively large amounts of CPU time. As a result, range values are calculated for the loaded timestep only. This means that values which appear as global range, are in fact ranges that exist for that timestep only. The CFX-4 solver uses a cell-based solution method, whereas the CFX-5 solver uses a node-based solution method. Data on nodes are interpolated from cell centres in CFX-Post. Consider the following diagram:
Wall X O X Inlet X CFX-5 node O CFX-4 cell centre O

The interpolation procedure encounters a problem at the node location where the wall intersects the inlet boundary. To work around the problem, a priority number is assigned to each "patch" by CFX-Post. This means that, for example with the above diagram, if the wall has a higher priority number than the inlet, the value for the node is interpolated from the wall value of the CFX-4 solution. When considering a situation in 3D, the priority of all faces is read and interpolation occurs from the face(s) with the highest priority. CFX-Post will use the same default values for every problem, so

CFX-5.5.1

Introduction

Page 11

CFX-Post File Menu

there are cases in which accuracy can be compromised. The errors can be minimised by refining the grid density in the region around problem areas. You will be allowed to modify the assigned priority numbers in future releases of CFX-Post. Quantitative calculations can suffer a loss of accuracy due to the limitation described above. The results of Mass Flow calculations should therefore be assumed to be approximations for the purposes of quantitative analysis. Particle tracking and heat flux are not available for CFX-4 results files for this release of CFX-5. Session File Session files are produced by CFX-Post and contain CCL commands. You can record the commands executed during a session to a file and then play back the file at a later data. You can also write your own Session files in a text editor. See Session Menu (p. 37) for further details. State File State files are produced by CFX-Post and contain CCL commands. They differ from session files in that only a snap-shot of the current state is saved to a file. You can also write your own State files using any text editor. See Save State (p. 14) and Load State (p. 15) for more information.

Page 12

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post File Menu

File Menu Items Load Results File

Browse to nd the le you require, then click Open to load the data into CFX-Post. The DATA READER object contains settings for loading a results le, see DATA READER (p. 270 in CFX-Post) for details.

CFX-5 Results les (*.res), backup les (*.bak) CFX-5 Denition les (*.def), full transient results les (*.trn), *.res.err les and CFX-4 results (dmp) les can be read by CFX-Post. See CFX-Post File Types (p. 10 in CFXPost) for details of valid les.

 More Help:
File Menu (p. 9 in CFX-Post) CFX-Post File Types (p. 10 in CFX-Post) Load Results File (p. 13 in CFX-Post) DATA READER (p. 270 in CFX-Post)

To load a results file select Load Results... from the File menu, then browse to the file you wish to load and click Open. CFX-5 Results Files and CFX-5 Definition Files can be loaded from this panel, see CFX-Post File Types (p. 10) for information on valid results and definition files.

CFX-5.5.1

File Menu Items

Page 13

CFX-Post File Menu

When a results file is loaded, all Domain, Boundary and Variable objects associated with the results file are automatically created or updated. This would typically include the wireframe model of the geometry and all of the boundary condition created in CFX-Build. The data associated with a variable is not loaded until the variable is actually used. If you have created objects (e.g. Planes, Vector plots) with one set of results, and then load a new results file into CFX-Post, the new results will be plotted on all objects previously created.

Save State
When the Save All Objects toggle is disabled, you can select the Objects to save to the State le by clicking on each Objects Name.

Enable the Save All Objects toggle to write the current state of all Objects to the State le.

State les should be saved with a .cst le extension.

 More Help:
Load State (p. 16 in CFX-Post) File Menu (p. 9 in CFX-Post) STATE (p. 272 in CFX-Post)

Page 14

File Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post File Menu

Selecting Save State produce a CCL file of the current CFX-Post state. All Objects listed in the Object Selector window along with their current settings are saved to the State file by default. A State file is linked to the results file from which it was created by an absolute path, therefore the location of the results file should not be changed. The state file does not contain the geometry, mesh or any results, these are loaded from the results file into CFX-Post. If you have not saved a State file during your current CFX-Post session, selecting Save State will open the Save State dialog window where you can enter a file name. State files should be saved with a .cst file extension. If you have already saved a previous state, selecting Save State will overwrite that file. To save a state to a different file name you should select Save State As... from the file menu.

CFX-5.5.1

File Menu Items

Page 15

CFX-Post File Menu

Load State
Enable Overwrite to delete existing Objects and create those dened in the State File. Enable Append to add the Objects dened in the State File to the existing Object Selector list. See Overwrite and Append (p. 16) for a detailed discussion on the behaviour of Overwrite and Append.

Enable the Load RES le toggle to replace the existing results with those linked to the selected State File.

State File should have a .cst le extension. The extension will be added to a le if State Files is selected as the File type

 More Help:
Overwrite and Append (p. 16 in CFX-Post) Save State (p. 14 in CFX-Post) File Menu (p. 9 in CFX-Post) STATE (p. 272 in CFX-Post)

Selecting Load State opens an existing state file. Overwrite and Append You can choose to either Overwrite or Append to the current state in CFX-Post. You can also choose to load the results file from which the State file was created. The result of these combinations is outlined below. Overwrite enabled and Load RES File enabled: the results file used to create the State file is opened, all existing Objects are deleted and new Objects which are defined in the state file are created. The results are plotted on the new Objects.
Page 16

File Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post File Menu

Overwrite enabled and Load RES File disabled: all existing Objects are deleted and new Objects which are defined in the state file are created. The results are plotted on the new Objects using the existing results. Append enabled and Load RES File enabled: the results file used to create the State file is opened. All Objects defined in the State file and all existing Objects are plotted with the new results. If Objects in the State file have the same name as existing Objects, the existing Objects are replaced by those in the State file. Append enabled and Load RES File disabled: all Objects defined in the State file are created and plotted using the current results. Existing Objects are not removed unless they have the same name as an Object in the State file, in which case they are replaced. Loading a State file in this way allows you to use a number of State files as building blocks for Objects that you commonly use.

Export
The Export action allows you to export your results to a data file which can then be used by other applications. You can export results for any available variable in CFX-Post on any defined locator. Results for multiple variables on multiple locators can be simultaneously written to a single file.

CFX-5.5.1

File Menu Items

Page 17

CFX-Post File Menu

Export: Options
Click to browse for a le to export the results to, or enter a new le name.

Click to reverse the ordering of the list of Variables.

Select the Variables to export results for. You can use the <Ctrl> key to select more than one Variable and the <Shift> key to select a block of Variables. Click to reverse the ordering of the list of Locators. Select the Locators on which the results of your Variable will be written. You can use the <Ctrl> key to select more than one Locator and the <Shift> key to select a block of Locators.

Click Save to write the selected Variable(s) on the selected Locator(s) to a data le.

 More Help:
Export (p. 17 in CFX-Post) File Menu (p. 9 in CFX-Post) Export: Formatting (p. 20 in CFX-Post) EXPORT (p. 271 in CFX-Post)

Whenever Save is clicked, the file existence is checked. If the filename already exists, you will be asked if you wish to overwrite the file.

Page 18

File Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post File Menu

Browse to a convenient directory.

Enter the name of the le (with a .dat extension).

 More Help:
File Menu (p. 9 in CFX-Post) CFX-Post File Types (p. 10 in CFX-Post) Export (p. 17 in CFX-Post)

Each line in the exported data file contains the values for all the selected Variables at a single point on a Locator. Variables are written to each line in the data file in the order in which they appear in the Selected Variable(s) list from top to bottom. For example, the first Variable on each line in the exported file is that which appears closest to the top of the Selected Variable(s) list (except X, Y and Z which will always appear first, if selected). If more than one Locator is selected, the Variables values are written for all nodes on the first Locator before values for nodes on subsequent Locators are written. This results in a block structure to the exported file with respect to Locators, i.e. the variable values at all points on Locator 1 are written before variable values on Locator 2 are written. Results are exported for Locators in the order in which they appear in the Locators list from top to bottom. The Variable values written to the data file are the values at each point on the selected locator. The data points on a Slice Plane locator, for example, are the points where the Slice Plane cuts through a mesh edge.

CFX-5.5.1

File Menu Items

Page 19

CFX-Post File Menu

Export: Formatting
Select the symbol used to denote undened variable values. See Null Token (p. 20) for an explanation of when a variable is undened. Select the object used to separate vector components and multiple variable entries. See Separator (p. 21) for details. Set the Precision with which your results are exported. See Precision (p. 21) for details. Select Components to write each component of a vector to the data le. The components will appear inside the selected Brackets. Select Scalar to write only the magnitude of a vector quantity. In this case the Brackets are not required.

Enable to include a header in the data le. The header includes the data and time generated and the format, locators and variables used.

 More Help:
Export (p. 17 in CFX-Post) File Menu (p. 9 in CFX-Post) Export: Options (p. 18 in CFX-Post) EXPORT (p. 271 in CFX-Post)

Null Token When a variable value is undefined, a Null Token is used in its place. You can select the item used as a Null Token from a predefined list. A variable is undefined when a value does not exist for it, examples include Velocity in a Solid Sub-domain and a variable value on a point outside the solution domain (as can be created using a Polyline, Sampling Plane or Surface locator). Some variables, including Yplus and Wall Shear, are only calculated on the boundaries of the domain and are assigned zero values elsewhere. Since a value exists for these variables they will not use the Null Token away from a boundary in the bulk of the domain.

Page 20

File Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post File Menu

Separator The Separator option allow you to select the symbol(s) used to separate numbers in the exported data file. The Separator token is used to separate variable values when you have selected to write more than one variable to the data file. It is also used to separate the components of vector variables. Precision The data is exported in scientific number format, and precision sets the quantity of numbers that appear after the decimal point. For example, 13490 set to a precision of 2, will output 1.35e+04. The same number set to a precision of 7 will yield 1.3490000e+04. Exporting data to be read back in as a Polyline Polylines (Polyline (p. 60)) can be created from data files or from boundary intersections. The data format for a Polyline is described in detail in POLYLINE Data Format (p. 198). The instructions below show how to save data using the Export form. It should be noted that you must NOT choose to export any variables with a "null" value as they will not be read. Choose a suitable filename for the data. Select X, Y and Z as the variables to export. Click on the Formatting tab menu. Use Space as the Separator Select Scalars as the Vector Variables option Select Include Header. Click Save to write the data to the file.

CFX-5.5.1

File Menu Items

Page 21

CFX-Post File Menu

Print
Click to open a Print Dialog Window where you can enter a le name. Click Save in this window to set the lename (this does not save the image le). You can also type a le path and name into the File: box. Select an image le format. See File Formats for Printing (p. 22 in CFXPost) When toggled, a screen capture of the Viewer is saved to the output. Note that Face Culling affects printouts done using Screen Capture mode only. Enable to colour white objects black and black objects white in the image le (except VRML). All objects are affected by this toggle and slightly off-white and offblack objects are also inverted. Choose between 0 (lowest) and 99 (highest) image quality (JPEG only). Default tolerance is 0.0001. A nondimensional tolerance used in face sorting when generating hardcopy output. Smaller values will result in faster printing times, but may cause defects in the resulting output.

 More Help:
Print (p. 22 in CFX-Post) File Menu (p. 9) HARDCOPY (p. 267 in CFX-Post)

Selecting File>Print allows you to print the current contents of the viewer to a file. The available file formats can be seen by clicking next to the Format box. To print to a file you can enter a file name and path into the File: box, or click the icon and browse to the directory in which the file will be saved. File Formats for Printing PostScript (*ps) and Encapsulated PostScript (*eps) are recommended for output to a printer or line drawings.
Page 22

File Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post File Menu

JPEG (*jpg) is a compressed file format developed for compressing raw digital information. File sizes are small but it is not recommended for line drawings. Bitmap (*bmp) files are usually large and do not adjust well to resizing or editing. They do retain all of the quality of the original image and can be easily converted to other formats. Portable Network Graphics (*png) is a file format intended to replace the GIF format. It was designed for use on the WorldWide Web and retains many of the features of GIF with new features added. Portable Pixel Map (*ppm) is similar to the Bitmap format. Virtual Reality Modelling Language (*wrl) is used to present interactive three-dimensional views and can be delivered across the WorldWide Web.

Browse to a convenient directory.

Enter the name of the le..

 More Help:
File Menu (p. 9 in CFX-Post) CFX-Post File Types (p. 10 in CFX-Post) Print (p. 22 in CFX-Post)

Loading Recently Accessed Files

Recent Results files CFX-Post saves the file paths of the last five results files opened. To re-open a recently used file select it from the drop-down list that appears when the mouse is over Recent Results Files.
File Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

Page 23

CFX-Post File Menu

Recent State Files CFX-Post saves the file paths of the last five state files opened. To reopen a recently used file select it from the drop-down list that appears when the mouse is over Recent State Files Recent Session files CFX-Post saves the file paths of the last five session files opened. To re-open a recently used file select it from the drop-down list that appears when the mouse is over Recent Session Files

Quit
To exit from CFX-Post select Quit from the file menu. Objects created during your CFX-Post session are not automatically saved, you should create a State (Save State (p. 14 in CFX-Post)) or Session (New Session (p. 39)) file if want to save the Objects before quitting.

Page 24

File Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

Edit Menu
Introduction p. 26 Undo and Redo p. 27 Options p. 27

CFX-5.5.1

Page 25

CFX-Post Edit Menu

Introduction
The options available from the Edit menu are outlined below with a summary of the function performed by each option
Undo Redo Options

Return to the state immediately before the last time Apply was executed or a Viewer icon was pressed. See Undo and Redo (p. 27). Reverses an Undo action. See Undo and Redo (p. 27). Allows you to control the appearance of the Graphical User Interface (GUI), set Mouse Mapping options, set Units options and select the Auto Apply mode. See Options (p. 27).

Page 26

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Edit Menu

Edit Menu Items Undo and Redo

CFX-Post includes an infinite undo feature, limited only by the available memory on your machine. Selecting undo will return you to the state immediately prior to when the last Apply action was executed. Further selections of undo will return you to consecutively prior states. The Undo stack is cleared whenever a new file is loaded. This means that a load cannot be undone. Undo will also reverse geometry manipulation where the named view icons located at the top of the Viewer window have been used. Rotate, Zoom and Translate action performed using the mouse are not affected by selecting undo. The redo feature is used to reverse an undo action. Redo can be selected repeatedly to reverse as many undo actions as have been applied.

Options
Selecting Options from the Edit menu allows you to set various Viewer and Appearance options in CFX-Post. Options: Viewer The current Viewer background colour is displayed next to the background widget. You can set the background colour of the Viewer by clicking on the icon next to the background widget to display the Select colour panel. Double Buffering Double Buffering is a feature supported by most OpenGL implementations. It provides two complete colour buffers that swap between each other to animate graphics smoothly. If your implementation of OpenGL does not support double buffering you can deselect this toggle. The line colour of any objects displayed in the Viewer is not changed by setting the Background colour.
CFX-5.5.1

Edit Menu Items

Page 27

CFX-Post Edit Menu

Select a background colour. Toggle the visibility of the reference axes in the Viewer.

Toggle double buffering. For info please see Double Buffering (p. 27 in CFX-Post)

 More Help:
Edit Menu (p. 25 in CFX-Post)

Mouse Mapping The Mouse Mapping options allow you to control which Viewer manipulation actions map to keyboard and mouse short-cuts. The default mouse mapping is given in the table below.

Modier Key None None None Shift Shift Shift Control Control Control

Mouse Button Left Middle Right Left Middle Right Left Middle Right

Action Rotate Zoom Translate Zoom Box Zoom In Zoom Out Rotate Z Set Pivot Point Move Light

The default setting can be changed so that any action is mapped to any of the modifier key/mouse button combinations listed in the above table. A diagram of the default mouse mapping is given below and can be printed out to use as a quick reference.
Page 28

Edit Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Edit Menu

Default Mouse Mapping for View Manipulation.

Rotate <Shift> Zoom Box <Ctrl> Rotate Z

Translate <Shift> Zoom Out <Ctrl> Move Light

Zoom <Shift> Zoom In <Ctrl> Set Pivot Point

A description of each action follows. Rotate: rotates the view about all three axes. Zoom: drag the pointer up to zoom out and down to zoom in. Translate: translates the view. Zoom Box: draw a rectangle around the area of interest, starting from the top left corner and ending at the bottom right corner. The selected area will fill the Viewer when the mouse button is released. Zoom In: click the mouse button to zoom in step-by-step centred on the location of the mouse pointer. Zoom Out: click the mouse button to zoom out step-by-step centred on the location of the mouse pointer. Rotate Z: rotate the view about the z-axis. Set Pivot Point: sets the point about which the Rotate and Rotate Z actions pivot. The point selected must be on an object in the Viewer.

CFX-5.5.1

Edit Menu Items

Page 29

CFX-Post Edit Menu

Move Light: move the lighting angle for the Viewer. Drag the mouse left or right to move the horizontal lighting source and up or down to move the vertical lighting source. The Light Angle hold two angular values between 0 - 180.

Press Apply to conrm the changes without closing the options menu.

Any of the actions can be customised to the mousekeyboard combinations. Simply select the command from the drop-down menu that you wish to assign to a mousekeyboard combination. See Mouse Mapping (p. 28 in CFX-Post) for a description of each action.

 More Help:
Mouse Mapping (p. 28 in CFX-Post) Options: Viewer (p. 27 in CFX-Post) Options (p. 27 in CFX-Post)

Page 30

Edit Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Edit Menu

Options: Appearance The appearance of the GUI can be controlled from the Appearance options. CFX-Post will set the default GUI Style to that of your machine, for example on Windows the GUI will have a Windows look to it. If, for example, you prefer an SGI appearance to the GUI, then you can select to use this instead of the Windows style. Any of the following appearances can be used on any machine: Windows Motif Motif Plus SGI Platinum CDE
Choose a GUI style based on the platform of your choice.

Choose a font style and size. Clicking here opens up the Select Font menu.

Click Apply to change the settings without closing the window.

Clicking Restore will return the settings to those stored in the database (i.e. to those committed last time Apply or Ok was pressed).

 More Help:
Options (p. 27 in CFX-Post) Edit Menu (p. 25 in CFX-Post)

The default font used within the GUI can also be set by clicking on the Font button to open the Select Font panel.

CFX-5.5.1

Edit Menu Items

Page 31

CFX-Post Edit Menu

When a new font is selected, the size of each panel within the GUI will adjust to accommodate the font selected. Options: General CFX-Post includes an auto-save function which backs up work at set time intervals. To configure the settings for the Auto Save feature click on General to open the panel. You may select the frequency of the Auto Save feature by picking a value from the drop-down menu. Auto Save can be disabled by selecting Never from the list. To select the temporary directory click on the your chosen directory. icon and browse to

Page 32

Edit Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Edit Menu

Browse to a convenient directory to which the Autosave feature will save state les. You should not enter a le name here.

 More Help:
Edit Menu (p. 25 in CFX-Post) Options: General (p. 32 in CFX-Post) State File (p. 12 in CFX-Post)

The Timeout value is an advanced feature. It sets the delay between a mouse control action and its execution.

Choose how often the state le will be automatically saved. You may select Never, which turns off automatic state le writing. Select where you wish the autosave state les be written to. The Timeout value is an advanced feature. It sets the delay between a mouse control action (ie Play, Stop during animation)and its execution.

 More Help:
Options: General (p. 32 in CFXPost) Options (p. 27 in CFX-Post) Edit Menu (p. 25 in CFX-Post)

CFX-5.5.1

Edit Menu Items

Page 33

CFX-Post Edit Menu

Options: Units The Units panel allows you to select the units you wish to use for any available variables. The units are also grouped into categories, such as SI, British, Custom, etc. You cannot change any of the predefined unit groups, but selecting the Custom option will allow you to specify any valid units for your variable. For example, you may wish to display Temperature in K (SI unit), but Pressure in bar. The units you select for a variable will appear wherever the variable is used. As an example, if you choose F as the unit of Temperature, and then create a plot coloured by Temperature, you would specify a User Specified temperature range in degrees F.
Note: Setting units in the Variable Editor will override the actual setting for that variable.

You can save your units settings and apply them to every CFX-Post session by enabling the Always convert units to Preferred Units toggle.

Page 34

Edit Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Edit Menu

Select a unit group type. When using the Custom units group, select the units you require for each variable Click here to set more variable units. Enabling this toggle will save the units settings and use them for all subsequent sessions.

 More Help:
Options: Units (p. 34 in CFX-Post) Edit Menu (p. 25 in CFX-Post) UNIT SYSTEM (p. 230 in CFX-Post)

CFX-5.5.1

Edit Menu Items

Page 35

CFX-Post Edit Menu

When using the Custom units group, select the units you require for each variable

 More Help:
Options: Units (p. 34 in CFX-Post) Edit Menu (p. 25 in CFX-Post)

Page 36

Edit Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

Session Menu
Introduction p. 38 Play Session p. 39 New Session p. 39 Start and Stop Recording p. 41

CFX-5.5.1

Page 37

CFX-Post Session Menu

Introduction
The options available from the Session menu are outlined below with a summary of the function performed by each option.
Play Session New Session Start Recording Stop Recording

Play an existing Session file. Create a new Session file. Start recording to the current Session file. Stop recording the current Session file. Session files contain a record of the commands issued during a CFX-Post session. Actions that will cause commands to be written to a session file include: Creation of new objects and changes to an Object committed by clicking Apply in the Object Editor window. Commands issued in the Command Editor window. Calculations performed in the Calculator window. Viewer manipulation performed using the icons located at the top of the Viewer window. Creation of new Cameras, selecting a Camera View and selecting a Clip Plane. All actions available from the File and Edit menus. Creation of Expressions and User Variables. Creation of Chart Lines and Viewing Charts.

Page 38

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Session Menu

Session Menu Items Play Session

Selecting Session > Play Session or clicking on the icon opens the Play Session File dialog window where you can select the Session file to play. The commands listed in the selected Session file are then executed. Existing Objects with the same name as Objects defined in the Session file are replaced by those in the Session file.

Browse to the directory containing the Session File

Click Open to play the Session le

File types that appear in the window can be ltered to show only .cse les.

 More Help:
Session Menu (p. 37 in CFX-Post) SESSION (p. 272 in CFX-Post)

New Session
Selecting Session > New Session or clicking on the icon opens the Set Session dialog window where you can enter a file name for your session file. Once you have clicked Save in the dialog window, that file becomes the current Session file. Commands are not written to the file until you select Start Recording.

CFX-5.5.1

Session Menu Items

Page 39

CFX-Post Session Menu

Browse to the directory in which you wish to create the Session File, then enter a name for the le ending with a .cse extension. Click here to create the le. This will not start recording to the Session le, you must select Session>Start Recording to do this.

 More Help:
Session Menu (p. 37 in CFX-Post) Start and Stop Recording (p. 41 in CFX-Post) SESSION (p. 272 in CFX-Post)

File types that appear in the window can be ltered to show only .cse les The extension will be added automatically whenever Session Files is selected as the File Type.

If you create more than one Session file during a CFX-Post session, the most recently created file is by default the current Session file. You can set a different file to be the current Session file by selecting an existing file from the Set Session File window and then clicking Save. The following message will then appear:

If Overwrite is selected the existing Session file will be deleted and then a new file created in its place. If Append is selected commands will be added to the end of the existing Session file when recording begins.

Page 40

Session Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Session Menu

Start and Stop Recording

The Start Recording action will activate recording of CCL commands issued to the current Session file. A Session file must first be set before you can Start Recording. Stop Recording terminates recording of CCL commands to the current Session file. You can Start and Stop Recording as many times as necessary to a Session file.

CFX-5.5.1

Session Menu Items

Page 41

CFX-Post Session Menu

Page 42

Session Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

Create Menu
Introduction (p. 44)

CFX-5.5.1

Page 43

CFX-Post Create Menu

Introduction
The Create menu is used to create new Objects in CFX-Post. When you select any of the Objects from the Create menu, a New Object window appears in which you can either accept the default name or enter a new one for the Object (in this case a Plane). The name should be different from any current Object of the same type to avoid overwriting the existing Object. CFX-Post will not let you create Objects with the same name but different types.

Click OK or press Enter to open the relevant Object Editor window. The Object does not exist in the database until you have clicked Apply on the Object Editor window. For information on how to create objects from the Command Line see Object Creation and Deletion (p. 172 in CFX-Post).
Point Line Plane Volume Isosurface Polyline Surface Vector Surface Group Plot Contour Plot Coordinate Frame Clip Plane Streamline

Create a new Point Create a new Line Create a new Plane Create a new Volume Create a new Isosurface Create a new Polyline Create a new Surface Create a new Vector Create a new Colour Plot Create a new Contour Plot Create a new Coordinate Frame Create a new Clip Plane Create a new Streamline Plot

Page 44

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Instancing Transformation Legend Text Chart Wireframe New

Create a new Instancing Transformation Add a Legend Add Text Create a new Chart Description, modification options Opens the New object panel to create any of the above objects

Common Widgets Some of the panels and options available in the Object Editor window are common to all or most of the graphic objects in CFX-Post (colour properties for example). Wherever a common window or panel is shared, links to the appropriate section can be found.

CFX-5.5.1

Introduction

Page 45

CFX-Post Create Menu

Point
A Point is marked by highlighting the mesh element in which the Point is placed. To create a Point select Create>Point from the main menu or click on the icon from the toolbar. For more information about valid CCL parameters for a Point, see POINT (p. 237 in CFX-Post). Point: Geometry
Points can be created at XYZ coordinates, min or max values of a chosen variable, or a given node number. When dening the point using XYZ coordinates. This is the only option available. You can type in values, use the embedded sliders (which have maximum and minimum values set to the corresponding maximum and minimum X, Y and Z values in the domain), or pick a point from the Viewer by clicking the icon. When creating at a Node Number, select the domain(s) and the node number. When creating the point at a Variable Minimum or Maximum, select the domain(s). Choose the locator and the variable.

Pick a Symbol to display the location of the Point and a Symbol Size between 0 - 10 (10 being a similar scale to your geometry).

Disable to make the point invisible in the Viewer.

 More Help:
Click Apply to create (or modify) the point.
Point (p. 46 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) POINT (p. 237 in CFX-Post)

Page 46

Point

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Domains See Selecting Domains (p. 117 in CFX-Post) for details. Point Definition Points can be created in the following ways: Using the XYZ option and entering three coordinates. The coordinates can be typed in, set using the embedded sliders or picked from the Viewer by clicking the icon located on the right side of the Geometry panel and then clicking a point in the Viewer.When picking a point from the Viewer you must select a point on the geometry and can not simply pick a point of the background. The Viewer will default to Picking Mode when the Pick from Viewer icon is selected. The point can lie outside of the domain. Variable Minimum/Variable Maximum. You can plot the point where a variable is at its maximum or minimum value on any named locator. Select the domain(s) and then select the locator name and the variable of interest. When more than one domain is selected, a point is created for the maximum/minimum value of the variable within each domain. Node Number. To plot a point at a nodal location, choose the domain(s) and enter the node number. When more than one domain is selected, a point is created for the specified node number in each domain (if it exists). If the node number does not exist in one domain but exists in another, you should select only the domain in which the node exists, or an error message will be displayed. Point Translation using Picking Mode You can use Picking Mode (Picking Mode (p. 109)) to select or translate any point in the viewer which was created using the XYZ method. To move a point, select picking mode by clicking on the icon and drag the plane to a new location. The point properties will automatically update in the Object Editor.
Note: You cannot move points which have been defined using Variable Min/Max or Node Number.

CFX-5.5.1

Point

Page 47

CFX-Post Create Menu

Point: Colour The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Point: Render The Rendering settings can be changed by clicking on Render tab, see Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121).

Page 48

Point

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Line
A line locator can exist between 2 points anywhere within or outside the domain. To create a Line, select Create>Line from the main menu bar or click the icon. Line: Geometry

Two Points is the only method available to dene a line Enter the co-ordinates, use the embedded sliders, or use the picking icon to select a point in the domain.

Choose a Cut or Sample method. Cut will extend the line in both directions until it reaches the edge of the domain. Points on this line exist where the line intersects with a mesh element face. A Sample line exists between the 2 points entered. It is mesh independent, and the number of points along the line corresponds to the value you enter in the Samples box.

 More Help:
Click Apply to create (or modify) the point.
Line: Geometry (p. 49 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) LINE (p. 262 in CFX-Post)

Domains See Selecting Domains (p. 117 in CFX-Post) for details.

CFX-5.5.1

Line

Page 49

CFX-Post Create Menu

Line Definition Lines are created by specifying two points. These points can either be entered into the Point 1 and Point 2 boxes, selected using the embedded sliders or picked by clicking on the picking mode icon , and selecting a point within the domain. Line Type Two options are available for the type of line. Cut will extend the line until it reaches the edge of the domain in both directions. It is similar to the way that a Slice Plane behaves, in that points on the line correspond to points where the line intersects a mesh element face. As a result, the number of points on the line is indirectly proportional to the mesh spacing. Sample will draw the line between the 2 points you have specified. The number of points along the line will correspond to the value you enter in the Samples box. The Sample line is a set of evenly-spaced sampling points which are independent of the mesh spacing. Line Translation using Picking Mode You can use Picking Mode (Picking Mode (p. 109)) to select or translate a line in the viewer. To move a line, select picking mode by clicking on the icon and drag the plane to a new location. The line properties will automatically update in the Object Editor. Line: Colour The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Line: Render You can change the Line Width and the Instancing Properties for a Line. Both these settings are documented in Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121)

Page 50

Line

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Plane
A plane is a two-dimensional area that exists only within the boundaries of the computational domain. To create a new plane select Create>Plane from the main menu or click on the icon from the toolbar. For more information about valid CCL parameters for a Plane, see PLANE (p. 254 in CFX-Post). Plane: Geometry
Choose the Domain(s) to plot the plane in. You can choose more than one Domain by typing the Domain names separated by a comma. See Selecting Domains (p. 117 in CFX-Post) for details. Dene the plane using: YZ Plane: a Plane normal to the X axis ZX Plane: a Plane normal to the Y axis XY Plane: a Plane normal to the Z axis Point and Normal: dene a point on the plane and a normal vector to the plane. Three Points: dene three points on the plane. See Plane Denition (p. 52) for details. Click the minus symbol to minimise a section of the panel. Note that when the plus symbol is used to maximise a section, the other sections are automatically minimised (not shown here). Select the option to dene the boundaries of the plane from None, Circular or Rectangular. See Plane Bounds (p. 53) for details on setting the values for each option. Select either a Slice or Sample Plane. For a Sample Plane you must enter the number of Samples to take along each coordinate direction of the Plane. See Plane Type (p. 53) for details on selecting a Plane Type and setting the associated values.

 More Help:
Disable to make the plane invisible in the Viewer.
Plane (p. 51 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) PLANE (p. 254 in CFX-Post)

CFX-5.5.1

Plane

Page 51

CFX-Post Create Menu

In the Object Editor window, the Geometry panel is used to define the location and extent of a plane. Domains See Selecting Domains (p. 117) for details. Plane Definition Planes can be created by choosing an XY, ZX or YZ plane. You can also define custom planes by specifying three points on the plane, or a single point on the plane and a vector normal to the plane. The points can be typed in, set using the embedded sliders or picked from the Viewer by clicking the icon located on the right side of the Geometry panel and then clicking a point in the Viewer. The default planes use the current axes as a basis. For example, choosing a ZX plane will produce a plane that is normal to the Y axis and choosing a YZ plane will produce a plane that is normal to the X axis. When picking points from the Viewer for the Point and Normal or Three Points options, you must select a point on the geometry and can not simply pick a point of the background. When entering values using the keyboard or the sliders for the Normal vector, the Point definition is not used since the values entered form the components of the vector. For the Three Point option the normal vector to the plane is calculated using the right-hand rule. The first vector is from Point 1 to Point 2 and the second is from Point 1 to Point 3 as shown in the diagram below. The direction of this vector might be important if you are using the plane to define, for example, a Clip Plane.

Point 3

n v2
Point 2

v1
Point 1

n = v1 x v2
Page 52

Plane

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Plane Bounds The Plane Bounds can be set to None, Circular (where a radius is required) or Rectangular (where an X and Y Size and an X Angle are required). When None is selected the Plane cuts through a complete crosssection of each domain specified in the Domains list. The Plane is only bounded by the limits of the domain. The Circular option defines the bounds of a Plane as a circle centred at the Point used in the Plane Definition. The radius of the circle can be entered as a value or, by clicking the Expression icon to the right of the Radius widget, as an expression. The Plane is undefined in areas where the circle extends outside of the domains specified in the Domains list. For the Rectangle option the plane bounds are defined by a rectangle centred about the Point selected in the Plane Definition with lengths in the x and y-directions of X Size and Y Size respectively. The size is with determined with reference to the plane centre (i.e. the plane is resized around its centre). The X Angle value will rotate the plane counter-clockwise about its normal by the specified number of degrees. Both the Circular and Rectangular options have an Invert Plane Bounds toggle. If this toggle is enabled, the area defined by the Rectangle or Circle is used as a cut-out area from a Slice Plane which is bounded only by the domain(s). The area inside the bounds of the Rectangle or Circle does not form part of the plane, but everything on the Slice Plane outside of these bounds is included. Plane Type You can set the Plane Type to either Slice or Sample. A Slice Plane differs from a Sampling Plane in several ways. A Sampling Plane is a set of evenly-spaced sampling points which are independent of the mesh. When you create a Slice Plane, you have no control over the sampling points; they are placed at places on the plane where the Slice Plane intersects an edge of the mesh. Hence the density of sampling points in a Slice Plane is related to the length scale of the mesh.

CFX-5.5.1

Plane

Page 53

CFX-Post Create Menu

When you use the Slice Plane for Vector Plots, the seeds are the points where the plane intersects a point on the edge of three mesh elements. You can view the seeds by turning on the Draw Lines option on the Render panel for the Plane. When creating a sampling plane, the Plane Bounds must be either Circular or Rectangular. For the Circular option, the density of sampling points is then determined by the radius of the plane specified in the Plane Bound panel, and the number of Radial and Circumferential sampling points. For Rectangular bounds, you should specify the size of the bounds for your plane in each of the plane directions. The density of sampling points depends on the size of the plane and the number of Samples.in each of the two coordinate directions that describe the plane. Certain types of plots will show small differences across GGI interfaces. This is to be expected when the nodes of the computational grids on each side of a GGI connection do not match. For example, contour lines or fringe lines may not match exactly across a GGI interface. This is usually a very minor effect and is not an indicator of any problem. Plane Translation using Picking Mode You can use Picking Mode (Picking Mode (p. 109)) to select or translate a plane in the viewer. To move a plane, select picking mode by clicking on the icon and drag the plane to a new location. The plane properties will automatically update in the Object Editor. Plane: Colour The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Plane: Render The Rendering settings can be changed by clicking on Render tab, see Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121).

Page 54

Plane

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Volume
A Volume is a collection of mesh elements and can be created anywhere within the domain. A variable can then be plotted on the surface of the Volume (e.g. a surface plot of temperature), or the Volume can be used as a locator for other objects such as Vector plots, and calculations such as averages, integrals etc. can be performed on them. When using the Volume as a locator, seeds are created on the surface and in the internal space of the Volume. Click on the icon in the toolbar to create a volume. For more information about valid CCL parameters for a Volume, see VOLUME (p. 259 in CFX-Post). Volume: Geometry
Select the Domain(s) for the Volume to exist in. The options available for are Sphere, From Surface and Isovolume (used when creating PlaneVolumes). Enter the coordinates for the centre of the Volume. You can also pick the point directly from the Viewer by clicking on the picking icon and then clicking on a point of your geometry in the Viewer. Choose the Surface if you selected From Surface as the Method. If you selected Isovolume, select the Variable and its Value. Enter a radius for the Volume. Choose a Mode for the Volume. For a Spherevolume or From Surface Method, Intersection will plot on the elements that intersect your region only. Above and Below Intersection will plot above and below those values respectively. Restore the values For an Isovolume, Above and Below Values will plot stored in the database. above and below the value of the variable respectively. At Value plots at the value of the Return to the CFX-Post variable. Between Values requires you to specify two default settings. values, between which the Isovolume will be created. The Inclusive toggle will plot at the intersection of your specied location as well as above or below., depending on the Mode you have chosen.
CFX-5.5.1

 More Help:
Volume: Geometry (p. 55 in CFX-Post) Volume (p. 55 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) VOLUME (p. 259 in CFX-Post)

Volume

Page 55

CFX-Post Create Menu

Domains See Selecting Domains (p. 117) for details. Volume Definition Volumes will not be displayed as perfect shapes (e.g. a perfect sphere) because mesh elements are either included or excluded from the Volume. You can choose to create a Sphere, Plane or Isovolume. To create a SphereVolume, select Sphere as the method. You can then enter a centre point and radius for the sphere. Any volume elements whose geometric centres lie on the surface described by your input settings will be drawn. You may also fill any areas of the domain that lie within this radius. Above intersection will fill any part of the domain that describes a variable value greater than the one specified. (for example, it will fill the domain anywhere where the radius is greater than 1m for the settings on this form). If you wish to create a Planevolume, you can: Create an Isovolume using Isovolume as the Method. You can then choose a value of X Y or Z as the Variable. This method limits you to plotting on the global axes, but will allow you to plot the area between two planes (by using the Between Values Mode). Plot on an existing plane (see Plane (p. 51)) and then select From Surface as the Method. Using this method you have a greater flexibility in the location of the plane. To create an Isovolume you can: Create an Isovolume directly by selecting Isovolume as the method and entering a variable and its value. With this method you can plot between 2 different values (by using the Between Values mode). Plot on an existing Isosurface by choosing the From Surface Method. When using the Isovolume method, you may also plot between 2 values of any variable. Choose whether to also plot the intersecting elements by enabling the Inclusive toggle.
Page 56

Volume

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Volume: Colour The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Volume: Render The Rendering settings can be changed by clicking on Render tab, see Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121).

CFX-5.5.1

Volume

Page 57

CFX-Post Create Menu

Isosurface
An Isosurface is a surface upon which a particular variable has a constant value, called the level. For instance, an Isosurface of pressure would be a surface consisting of all the points in the geometry where the pressure took a value of 1.32e+05 Pa for example. In CFX-Post, Isosurfaces can be defined using any variable. You may also colour the Isosurface using any variable or choose a constant colour. You should not select the Local Range option when colouring an Isosurface with the variable used to define it. In this case the Local Range is zero by definition and a plot would only highlight round-off errors. To create a new Isosurface select Create>Isosurface or click on the icon from the toolbar. For more information about valid CCL parameters for an Isosurface, see ISOSURFACE (p. 250 in CFXPost). Isosurface: Geometry The Geometry panel describes the location and extent of the Isosurface. Domains See Selecting Domains (p. 117) for details. Variable and Value Choose the plot variable for the isosurface from the Variable menu. Choose whether to use Hybrid or Conservative values (see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values (p. 153) for more details), and then select a value for the variable either by typing it into the Value box directly or using the embedded slider.

Page 58

Isosurface

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Select the domain(s) for the Isosurface to exist in. You can select multiple domains by typing their names separated by commas. Select a variable from the list. Choose Hybrid or Conservative variable values. Enter a value for your variable or click on the expression button to enter an expression. A surface connecting all locations with the value entered of the selected variable will be plotted Return to the system default settings. Click Apply to create the Isosurface. Restore the values stored in the database.

 More Help:
Isosurface (p. 58 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) ISOSURFACE (p. 250 in CFX-Post)

Isosurface: Colour The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Isosurface: Render The Rendering settings can be changed by clicking on Render tab, see Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121).

CFX-5.5.1

Isosurface

Page 59

CFX-Post Create Menu

Polyline
A Polyline is a line connecting a series of points. The points may have local (path) variables associated with them. The polyline can interact with CFD data and can be coloured using path variables or domain variables. To create a Polyline select Create>Polyline or click on the icon in the toolbar. For more information about valid CCL parameters for a Polyline, see POLYLINE (p. 240 in CFX-Post). Polyline: Geometry Boundary Intersection Method The Boundary Intersection method is the simplest way to create a Polyline. It uses the intersecting line between one or more of the predefined boundaries in your problem and any 2-D locator. The Domains pull-down menu is used to select the Domain(s) for the Polyline to exist in, see Selecting Domains (p. 117) for further details. After choosing the domain(s), select one of the pre-existing boundaries (anywhere a boundary condition was defined in the problem set-up) from the Boundary List menu. Select one of the graphic objects which intersects the boundary from the Location menu. From File Method You may not always be able to create the required Polyline using the Boundary Intersection Method. A more versatile option is to use the data read from a file. The From File method is used For details of the required format for a Polyline data file, see POLYLINE Data Format (p. 198 in CFX-Post). The following form will appear for you to select the file:

Page 60

Polyline

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Browse to a convenient directory. Enter the name of the le or select it from the list. Files should have a .dat extension.

 More Help:
Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) Polyline (p. 60 in CFX-Post) Surface (p. 63 in CFX-Post) POLYLINE Data Format (p. 198 in CFX-Post) USER SURFACE Data Format (p. 199 in CFXPost)

Select a Method from: From File. Reads points from a data le. See POLYLINE Data Format (p. 198 in CFX-Post) for details of the le format. Boundary Intersection: Creates the line of intersection between a Boundary and a locator. Select the Domain(s) in which the Polyline will exist. Select the Boundary (boundaries) which will intersect the Location to dene the Polyline. Select the Location which will intersect the Boundary to dene the Polyline. Restore the values stored in the database. Return to the CFX-Post default settings.

 More Help:
Polyline (p. 60 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) POLYLINE Data Format (p. 198 in CFX-Post) POLYLINE (p. 240 in CFX-Post)

CFX-5.5.1

Polyline

Page 61

CFX-Post Create Menu

Polyline: Colour The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Polyline: Render The Rendering settings can be changed by clicking on Render tab, see Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121).

Page 62

Polyline

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Surface
A user surface can be defined either from a file or from the intersection of a Boundary List and a Locator. For information about the data format for a user surface defined from a file see USER SURFACE Data Format (p. 199 in CFX-Post). When a user surface is created using the Boundary Intersection method, a line of intersection between the Boundary List and the Locator is created. Any mesh elements through which the line of intersection passes form part of the user surface. This will usually result in a narrow surface with a varying width. The fluctuation in width will become more noticeable as the mesh becomes more coarse. To create a user surface, select Create>Surface or click on the icon from the toolbar. For more information about valid CCL parameters for a Surface, see USER SURFACE (p. 252 in CFX-Post). Surface: Geometry
Choose a method. Available options are From File and Boundary Intersection. See Surface (p. 63 in CFX-Post) for details. Select the Domain(s) for the User Surface to exist in. Pick the Boundary List. A line of intersection is formed between these Boundaries and the Location. Each mesh element that the line passes through forms part of the User Surface. You can select more than one Boundary by typing in their names separated by commas, or clicking the icon to open the Location Editor. Choose the locator to intersect the Boundary List.

 More Help:
Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) USER SURFACE Data Format (p. 199 in CFX-Post) USER SURFACE (p. 252 in CFX-Post)

CFX-5.5.1

Surface

Page 63

CFX-Post Create Menu

See Selecting Domains (p. 117) for details on picking the Domain(s) for the User Surface to exist in. After choosing the domain, select one or more of the pre-existing boundaries (anywhere that a boundary condition was defined in the problem setup) from the Boundary List menu. Select one of the graphic objects which intersects the boundary from the Location menu. Surface: Colour The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Surface: Render The Rendering settings can be changed by clicking on Render tab, see Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121).

Page 64

Surface

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Vector
A Vector Plot is a collection of vectors drawn to show the direction and magnitude (optional) of a vector variable on a collection of points. These points are known as seeds, and are defined by a locator. To create a vector plot select Create>Vector or click on the icon from the toolbar. For more information about valid CCL parameters for a Vector, see VECTOR (p. 247 in CFX-Post). When post-processing a GGI simulation, the velocity vectors can be plotted in the local frame of reference for each domain ("Velocity" field selection)., or in the absolute frame of reference for each domain ("Velocity in the Stationary Frame"). These two choices produce the same plot in all stationary frame domains, but plot either the rotating (relative) frame or absolute frame velocity vectors in domains that are in the rotating frame of reference. Vector: Geometry Domains See Selecting Domains (p. 117) for details. Enter the name of the locator on which you wish to plot. The Symbol Size and Transparency can be altered by entering values in the appropriate boxes. Enter the Variable name (e.g. for velocity simply enter Velocity) Choose whether to use Hybrid or Conservative values (see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values (p. 153) for more details). There are a number of options available for vector projection. Normal will project vectors normal to the object, Tangential will plot tangential to the object and Coord Frame will plot tangential to a global axis of X Y or Z. You can select from a range of vector symbols including arrows, cross-hairs and octahedra from the Symbol submenu.

CFX-5.5.1

Vector

Page 65

CFX-Post Create Menu

Select the Domain(s) for the Vector plot to exist in. Select the locator(s) to provide seeds for the vectors. A vector will be plotted at each point on the locator(s). Select the vector variable to plot. Scalar variables are not available. Select Hybrid or Conservative values on which to base the vector plot. Choose to project the vectors Normal to the object, Tangential to the object, or Tangential to a user dened Coord frame. You can then specify X, Y or Z as the coordinate frame. The Symbol Size determines the length of the vectors. Enable the normalised toggle to make all vector equal in length. With the toggle disabled the length of a vector in the Viewer is proportional to the magnitude of the vector variable. Select a symbol to display the vectors

 More Help:
Vector (p. 65 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) VECTOR (p. 247 in CFX-Post)

Vector: Colour The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Vector: Render The Rendering settings can be changed by clicking on Render tab, see Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121).

Page 66

Vector

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Surface Group Plot

A surface group plot allows you to colour several objects at a time. To create a Colour plot, select Create>Surface Group from the main menu bar or click the icon. Surface Group: Definition

Select the Domain for the Surface Group Plot. Choose the Location. If you wish to use multiple locators, click the icon and hold down the <Ctrl> key as you select each locator from the list

 More Help:
Surface Group: Definition (p. 67 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) SURFACE GROUP (p. 265 in CFX-Post)

Click here to create the Surface Group Plot.

Domains See Selecting Domains (p. 117) for picking the domain. Location Select the locator on which you wish to plot. To select multiple locators, click the icon and hold down the <Ctrl> key as you select each locator. Surface Group: Colour The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Surface Group: Render The Rendering settings can be changed by clicking on Render tab, see Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121).
CFX-5.5.1

Surface Group Plot

Page 67

CFX-Post Create Menu

Contour Plot
A Contour Plot is a series of lines linking points with equal values of a given variable. For example, contours of height exist on geographical maps and give an impression of gradient and land shape. Contour Plot: Definition
Select the name of the object to create a Legend for. Choose the Location for the Contour Plot Select a plot variable. Select a Range over which to plot Choose Hybrid or Conservative values

Set the number of contours. Toggle visibility on or off.

 More Help:
Contour Plot (p. 68 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) CONTOUR (p. 263 in CFX-Post)

Click here to create the Contour Plot.

See Selecting Domains (p. 117) for picking the domain. Select a Location for the contour plot from the list. Choose a Variable for the contour plot from the list. Select the Range over which the contour plot will be based. Options available are Global, Local, User Specified and Value List. Value List is a list separated by commas that allows you to specify the actual values at which contours should be plotted. For example, if

Page 68

Contour Plot

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

plotting temperature in a combustor you might try a value list of 300, 500, 700, 900 and 1100K. It should be noted that entering a value list will override the number specified in the # of Contours box (see below). Select Hybrid or Conservative values (see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values (p. 153). You can choose the number of contours to appear on the plot by entering a value into the box using the embedded slider or the incremental arrows. Contour Plot: Labels
This setting adds numbers to the contour lines. Alter the text height to change its size. Select a text font from the list Click here to select a colour for the text.

 More Help:
Contour Plot: Render (p. 70 in CFX-Post) Contour Plot (p. 68 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) CONTOUR (p. 263 in CFX-Post)

Click here to create the Contour Plot.

The Show Numbers checkbox toggles whether numbers will appear on the plot. To view the values of the plotted variable at each contour number, create a legend of the contour plot (see Legend (p. 91) for more information). If you wish to change the size of the text that appears, enter a new value into the Text Height box or use the embedded slider. Change the text font by selecting a font from the Text Font list. To change the text colour, click on the colour.
CFX-5.5.1

icon and choose a

Contour Plot

Page 69

CFX-Post Create Menu

Contour Plot: Render Draw Faces shades the area between contour lines with a colour that corresponds to a value midway between the upper and lower contour line value. For example, for a contour line at 1000 Pa and a contour line at 1200 Pa, the shaded area will have a colour that corresponds to 1100 Pa. It is controlled by a toggle switch. If you have created a legend for the contour plot, you will notice that the legend adopts flat shading between 2 contour levels. By referring to the legend, the variable values can quickly be associated with the shaded regions of the plot. The options available for shading are Smooth Shading and None. You can turn off the visibility of the lines by switching off the Draw Lines toggle.
Page 70

Contour Plot

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

To view the contour lines as a single colour, turn on the Constant Colour toggle, and select a colour from the list (by clicking ).

This setting toggles shading between contour lines Alter the transparency by choosing a value between 0 and 1. Select a shading option. Options available are Smooth Shading and None Toggle lighting on or off Toggle for drawing contour lines Select a line width if drawing lines Toggle constant colouring Choose a colour for constant colouring. Change the instancing options. Please see Instancing Transformation (p. 86 in CFXPost) and Applying Instancing Transforms to objects (p. 123 in CFXPost) for further information. Toggle visibility on or off.

 More Help:
Click here to create the Contour Plot.
Contour Plot: Render (p. 70 in CFX-Post) Contour Plot (p. 68 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) CONTOUR (p. 263 in CFX-Post)

CFX-5.5.1

Contour Plot

Page 71

CFX-Post Create Menu

Coordinate Frame
It may be necessary to define a new coordinate frame with certain types of geometry. This can be done easily in CFX-Post by selecting Create>Coord Frame or clicking on the icon in the toolbar. For more information about valid CCL parameters for the COORD FRAME object see COORD FRAME (p. 288 in CFX-Post). Coordinate Frame: Definition
Select the type of Coordinate frame. Select coordinates for the Origin of the new coordinate frame. Pick a point on the positive Axis 3 in the new frame. Pick a point on the Axis 1-Axis 3 plane. See Coordinate Frame (p. 72 in CFXPost) for a detailed explanation. Enter the points into the boxes, use the embedded sliders or click on the icon and pick a point directly from the viewer (the Viewer will default into Picking Mode). Click here to create the point. Disable to make the Coord Frame invisible in the Viewer.

 More Help:
Coordinate Frame (p. 72 in CFX-Post) Coordinate Frame Example (p. 74 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) COORD FRAME (p. 288 in CFX-Post)

CFX-Post allows for the creation of a completely independent coordinate system. A different coordinate frame can be used in situations where the default system is unsuitable for creating the required objects. In CFX-Post the new Cartesian axes are labelled using the following colours: Axis 1 is labelled RED Axis 2 is labelled GREEN
Page 72

Coordinate Frame

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Axis 3 is labelled BLUE. The coordinate frame is created by specifying three points. It is important to understand the way in which these three points are used in order to create the desired coordinate frame. The first point defined is the origin for the new coordinate frame (labelled Origin in the Coord Frame panel). The second point defined is used to create Axis 3 in the new frame. A vector is calculated from the Origin to the point defined in the Axis 3 Pt box and used as the third axis of the new coordinate frame. The plane normal to Axis 3 is now set and will contain both Axis 1 and Axis 2.
Axis 3

Axis 1 and Axis 2 must exist in the plane normal to Axis 3.

Origin

A third point entered into the 1-3 Plane Pt box is needed to define the location of Axis 1 and Axis 2 in the plane normal to Axis 3. The 1-3 Plane Pt point, along with the two points already specified, define a plane which lies in the Axis 1-Axis 3 plane (see diagram below). Since Axis 1 must now lie in both the Axis 1-Axis 3 plane and the plane normal to Axis 3 its location must be the line of intersection between the two planes. The positive direction for Axis 1 is the same side as the 1-3 Plane Pt point lies with respect to Axis 3.

CFX-5.5.1

Coordinate Frame

Page 73

CFX-Post Create Menu

A Plane containing the Origin, Axis 3 and 1-3 Plane Pt.

Axis 3 Plane normal to Axis 3

Point 1-3 Plane Pt. Its location relative to Axis 3 is irrelevant. Its projection onto the plane normal to Axis 3 will form the positive Axis 1.

Origin

Axis 2 Axis 1

Finally Axis 2 must be perpendicular to both Axis 1 and Axis 3; its positive direction is determined by the right-hand rule. If 1-3 Plane Pt is specified such that it lies on Axis 3 an error will be raised since the two planes will coincide. Coordinate Frame Example In the example below the coordinate frame to the left of the Viewer has Axis 1, Axis 2 and Axis 3 defined to coincide with the default X, Y and Z axes in CFX-Post with an origin at (0,0,0). The coordinate frame to the right side of the Viewer has a different origin and axes directions defined as follows: The Axis 1 points along the Y axis. The Axis 2 points along the Z axis. The Axis 3 points along the X axis. The first step is to define the origin. In this example coordinates of (1,1,0) were entered into the Origin box.

Page 74

Coordinate Frame

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

The second step is to define a point on Axis 3, we require Axis 3 to point along the default X axis. Any point which has the same Y and Z values as the Origin and an X value greater than that of the Origin (>1) will work. If the X value was less than 1, Axis 3 would point along the default negative X axis. The point (2,1,0) is used as the Axis 3 Pt in this example. The final step is to define a point in on the Axis 1-Axis 3 plane. In this example the X value entered is irrelevant since Axis 3 is parallel to the X axis. We require Axis 1 to point along the default Y axis. Any point with a Z value equal to that of the Origin (0) and a Y value greater that that of the Origin (1) will work. If the Y value was less than 1, Axis 1 would point along the negative default Y axis. The point (2,2,0) is used in this example as the 1-3 Plane Pt.

CFX-5.5.1

Coordinate Frame

Page 75

CFX-Post Create Menu

Clip Plane
A Clip Plane allows you to define a plane which hides all Objects displayed in the Viewer which lie to one side of the plane. For example, you could use an XY plane and clip it at Z=1 so that Objects are only visible where Z is less than or equal to 1 (or greater than or equal to 1 if the Flip Normal toggle is enabled).
Note: A Clip Plane will act on all Objects in the Viewer, including the wireframe, but will not affect other functions such as calculations (i.e. a calculation will still use the entire location, whether visible or not).

To create a Clip Plane select Create>Clip Plane or click on the icon in the toolbar. For more information about valid CCL parameters for a Clip Plane, see CLIP PLANE (p. 257 in CFX-Post). Clip Plane: Geometry. You can specify the position of a Clip Plane by choosing one of the 3 default plane definitions (XY, YZ or XZ) and then picking a location on the Z, X or Y axes to set the planes position along that axis. Custom Planes can also be defined using the Point and Normal and Three Points methods. For more details on creating these planes, see Plane: Geometry (p. 51). If you have already defined another Slice Plane that you would like to use for clipping, select From Slice Plane from the Method list and then choose the plane you wish to use. The following form shows a composite of the four available ways to define a Clip Plane. You will only see one of the four options at any one time.

Page 76

Clip Plane

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Clip Planes can be deactivated by selecting No Clipping from the pull down menu in the top left of the Viewer. When selecting the YZ, ZX or XY Plane options, a Clip Plane is created using the default coordinate frame. You must then set an X, Y or Z value to use as a point on the Clip Plane. If you use an expression for this value it must return a single scalar value (e.g. sqrt(7.5)). Choose a default plane (YZ, ZX or XY) or dene a Point on the Clip Plane and a vector Normal to the plane. See Plane Definition (p. 52 in CFX-Post) for details. Dene three points on the Clip Plane. For more details please see Plane Definition (p. 52 in CFX-Post). You can create a Clip Plane using any other slice plane that you have created. Select the Slice Plane from the list or click on the icon to use the Location Editor. When disabled all Objects above the plane (the direction in which the normal vector points) are clipped. When enabled Objects below the plane are clipped. For the YZ, ZX and XY options, the normal vector points along the positive X, Y or Z axis respectively.

Click Apply to create the clip plane and activate it. To deactivate the clip plane, select No Clipping from the clipping selector at the top of the viewer..

 More Help:
Clip Plane (p. 76 in CFX-Post) Plane: Geometry (p. 51 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) CLIP PLANE (p. 257 in CFX-Post)

By default the Flip Normal toggle is disabled. With this setting everything in the Viewer to the side in which the positive normal vector points is hidden. For the YZ, ZX and XY options the normal vector points along the positive third axis (i.e. along the X, Y or Z axis

CFX-5.5.1

Clip Plane

Page 77

CFX-Post Create Menu

respectively). For the Point and Normal option and the Three Points options the behaviour is the same as when creating a Plane (see Plane: Geometry (p. 51) for details). For the From Slice Plane option the normal vector defined for that Slice Plane is used. As an example, using the XY Plane option with a Z value of 4 will clip Objects for any values of Z greater than 4. If you wish to clip Objects where Z is less than 4, you should enable the Flip Normal toggle. After creating your Clip Plane it will become active and the Clip Plane selector at the top of the viewer will change to show the name of the new clip plane. It can be de-activated by selecting No Clipping from the drop-down list.

Page 78

Clip Plane

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Streamline
A Streamline, in steady state flow, is the path that a particle of zero mass would take through the fluid domain driven by a vector field. The path is calculated using a Runge-Kutta method of vector variable integration with variable time step control. Streamlines start at each node on a given locator. The assumption of steady state flow is assumed when a streamline is created, even with a transient simulation. Although the CFX-Post streamline algorithm is very efficient, the calculation of large numbers of streamlines in a large domain can still take a long time. It is advisable when calculating streamlines for the first time on a solution to start drawing a few streamlines, and then to increase the number when you know how long it is likely to take. If you are starting your streamlines on an Inlet, or an Outlet, or a Slice Plane, you are advised to use the Reduction Factor parameter to reduce the number of streamlines to a few. If your solution is likely to contain recirculation areas, or regions of high vorticity, you are advised to reduce the Max Segments number (for example, to a few hundred). If the streamlines stop part of the way through the domain, increase the Max Segments gradually.

CFX-5.5.1

Streamline

Page 79

CFX-Post Create Menu

Streamline: Geometry
Select the domain(s) for the Streamlines to exist in. You can select multiple domains by typing their names separated by commas. Select a Location from the list. Choose a type of streamline. Choose a streamline variable from the list.. Choose Hybrid or Conservative values. Select the direction the streamlines will be drawn. Forward means in the positive gradient direction for that variable. Choose a reduction level. (e.g. entering 2 would draw only every second line) Toggles whether streamlines stop at periodic boundaries or re-enter at the opposite boundary.

 More Help:
Click Apply to create the Streamlines.
Streamline (p. 79 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) STREAMLINE (p. 230 in CFX-Post)

See Selecting Domains (p. 117) for picking the domain. Select the locator from where the streamlines begin from the Location list. Set the type of stream plot from the Type list. Select a variable from the list by clicking on the icon. It is usually not useful to select a variable other than a velocity for streamlines. Select Hybrid or Conservative values (see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values (p. 153).

Page 80

Streamline

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Choose a Streamline direction. If you choose Forward, streamlines are drawn from the specified locator in the positive variable direction. For example, a plane locator between the entrance and exit will produce streamlines flowing from the plane to the exit, when velocity is specified as the variable. Other options are Backwards and Backwards and Forwards Reduction allows you to decrease the number of streamlines drawn. This can be useful when there are too many streamlines to clearly observe a flow pattern. The number of streamlines is reduced by the integer entered in the box. .For example, entering 5 will only draw every fifth streamline. The Cross Periodics toggle defaults to OFF. When it is OFF, streamlines stop at periodic boundaries. When it is ON, streamlines exiting at periodic boundaries re-enter at the opposite boundary. For this case Periodic Boundary means both a Boundary of type 'Periodic' and a Boundary of type 'Interface' with a Domain Interface with type Periodic.

CFX-5.5.1

Streamline

Page 81

CFX-Post Create Menu

Streamline: Colour

Sets the colour Mode to Constant, Variable, Use Plot Variable, Time and Unique. The Variable options colours the object based on the selected Variable value at each point on the object. Use Plot Variable sets this Variable to be the same as that used on the Geometry Tab Panel.Time colours the streamline by the amount of time a massless particle would take to get to each point of the streamline, starting at the location. Unique gives each streamline a different colour along its whole length, and is used to track individual streamlines through a domain. Select the Variable with which to colour the object. Set the Range option to Global, Local or User Specied. See Range (p. 119 in CFX-Post) for details. Pick a colour for any locations on the object where variable values do not exist, see Undefined Colour (p. 120 in CFX-Post).

 More Help:
Streamline: Colour (p. 82 in CFX-Post) Streamline (p. 79 in CFX-Post) Object Editor (p. 116 in CFX-Post)

The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Colour tab, see There are two options for colouring streamlines not available on other objects. These are Time and Unique. Time colours the streamline by the amount of time a massless particle would take to get to each point of the streamline, starting at the location. Unique gives each streamline a different colour along its whole length, and is used to track individual streamlines through a domain. For help on the other options, please refer to Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118). Streamline: Symbol The Symbol feature adds markers to each streamline at given time intervals. The time intervals are set by the user.

Page 82

Streamline

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Toggle the visibility of symbols. Choose a start time. Choose an end (stop) time. Enter the incremental value for drawing of each symbol.. Toggle the visibility of Streamlines.

 More Help:
Click Apply to create the Streamlines.
Streamline (p. 79 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) STREAMLINE (p. 230 in CFX-Post)

Toggle the visibility of symbols by checking/unchecking the Draw Symbols box. In the Start box set the lower limit of the time where symbols appear. A real value or an expression can be entered. To enter an expression, click on the icon. In the End box set the upper limit of the time where the symbols appear. A real value or an expression can be entered. Set how frequently the symbols appear in time by entering a value in the Interval box. A real value or an expression can be entered. Streamline: Limits The Limits capability allows modification of the tolerance, segments and maximum time settings.

CFX-5.5.1

Streamline

Page 83

CFX-Post Create Menu

Choose whether the tolerance is set to Grid Relative or Absolute. Choose the tolerance value. You can set the maximum number of segments. The default value is 10000.. Set the maximum time to be represented by the streamlines. A time of 0s in this case represents innite time (since 0s would actually plot nothing). When Cross Periodics is switched on (on the Geometry tab) this sets the maximum number of times streamlines will re-enter through the periodic boundary. Click Apply to create the Streamlines.

More Help:  Streamline: Limits (p. 83 in CFX-Post)

Streamline (p. 79 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) STREAMLINE (p. 230 in CFX-Post)

Tolerance is used to control the accuracy of the streamline calculation. If the Tolerance is reduced, then the streamlines will be more accurate but will take longer to calculate. In order to ensure the accuracy of streamlines, whenever the streamline algorithm generates a new step (i.e. a new segment of the streamline) , the accuracy of the step is checked by taking a backward step from the new point. The backward step must lie within a given distance of the original position for the step to be accepted. If it is not, then a smaller step will be used. If Absolute is used, the backstep must lie within the distance specified of the original point to be accepted. If Grid Relative is used, then it must lie within the specified fraction of the local grid cell size.

Page 84

Streamline

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Choosing a Grid Relative tolerance means that the tolerance is directly proportional to the mesh spacing. In areas where the mesh has been refined (such as areas where the flow pattern changes quickly), the tolerance is reduced. This in turn produces more accurate streamlines in these areas. The Segment limit is used to ensure that the calculation of a streamline that never exits the domain does in fact terminate. If you believe that your streamlines may not exit the domain, then you would be advised to reduce the Max Segments, and to increase it gradually until enough length of streamlines is drawn for your case. The default is 10000. Max Time is the real time over which a streamline is drawn. The default time is 0s, which, for the purposes of this form, represents an indefinite (maximum) time. Max Periods specifies the maximum number of times a single streamline will exit a periodic boundary and re-enter. When this number is reached, the streamline will stop the next time it exits a periodic boundary. If the number is negative, then there is no limit on the number of periodic boundary crossings. The default is set to 20. For this case Periodic Boundary means both a Boundary of type 'Periodic' and a Boundary of type 'Interface' with a Domain Interface with type Periodic. Streamline: Render The Colour settings can be changed by clicking on the Render tab, see Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121).

CFX-5.5.1

Streamline

Page 85

CFX-Post Create Menu

Instancing Transformation
Instancing Transformations are used to replicate sections of the computational domain. A good example of the use of an instancing transformation is in the copying of a blade passage to produce a plot of an entire rotor or stator. Due to rotational symmetry, only one blade passage is solved for, reducing computing cost and time. CFX-Post can create instancing transformations using rotation, translation and reflection. Normally, to apply a transformation to an object, you will set an instancing transformation up using the Create Menu and then apply it to an object using its Render form. By default, an instancing transformation called Default Transform (which is set to apply no instancing by default) is applied to all objects where instancing transformations are possible. As a result, editing the definition of Default Transform will cause all plots and objects to be transformed (unless you turn off instancing for that object). See Applying Instancing Transforms to objects (p. 123) for more details. It should be noted that in this release of CFX-Post, instancing is purely geometric (in the viewer). This means that quantitative calculations can only be carried out for the original geometry.

Page 86

Instancing Transformation

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Instance Transform: Definition

Choose the number of times the domain will be replicated. Check to toggle rotation. Choose a principal axis or dene your own using two points.. This box will change depending on the method. For a Principal axis, choose between X, Y and Z. For a Rotation axis, enter co-ordinates of two points on the axis.. Check to toggle Full Circle rotation.. Enter an Angle if Full Circle is switched off.. Check to toggle translation. Enter the Translation vector. Check to toggle reection. Choose a plane in which reection will occur..

 More Help:
Rotation (p. 88 in CFX-Post) Translation (p. 88 in CFX-Post) Reflection (p. 88 in CFX-Post) Instancing Transformation (p. 86 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) INSTANCE TRANSFORM (p. 282 in CFX-Post)

Click Apply to create the Transform.

It should be noted that only the setup for instancing transforms is described here. An instancing transformation can applied to one or more objects; hence applying the transform is carried out using the Render form for that particular object. Please see Applying Instancing Transforms to objects (p. 123). The appearance of the form will change depending on which type of instancing you are working with. To expand the form for the type of instancing you wish to plot, click on the + sign next to Rotation, Translation or Reflection.
CFX-5.5.1

Instancing Transformation

Page 87

CFX-Post Create Menu

Rotation, Translation and Reflection can be coupled (for example you can combine rotation and reflection to simulate reflection in 2 planes.
Note: Coupling is carried out in the same order each time: Rotation, Translation and finally Reflection (depending on which type of instancing is applied). For example, if Rotation and Translation are chosen, the object is rotated before it is translated.

An instancing example is given at the end of this section; please see Instancing Transformation: Example (p. 89). Choose the Number of copies by entering a value or using the slider/incrementer (not used for Reflection). Rotation Check the box if you wish to Apply Rotation. You can choose either a Principal Axis (X, Y or Z) or define a custom Rotation Axis by entering two points. Choose a rotation Angle or choose Full Circle. If you choose Full Circle, the angle between each copy will be adjusted to uniformly distribute copies in 360 degrees. When applying an Angle for a case with rotational periodicity, enter the angle in degrees (relative to the axis of rotation for the problem) between the the two periodic boundaries. The resulting copies will be plotted adjacent to the original domain, around the axis of rotation. Translation Check the box if you wish to Apply Translation. In the Translation boxes, enter vector co-ordinates for X, Y and Z. Reflection Check the box if you wish to Apply Reflection. Choose a Plane from the list as the reflection plane. (You will need to define the plane separately. Please see Plane (p. 51).

Page 88

Instancing Transformation

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Instancing Transformation: Example The following example shows how coupling of rotation and reflection instancing can be used to simulate reflection in 2 planes using a random geometry.

The axis of rotation is defined using the Rotation Axis feature on the Rotation section of the Instance Transform Definition form. An axis parallel to the y-axis at Z=1 and X= -1 was set. Rotation only was applied initially. An angle or 180 degrees was implemented.

CFX-5.5.1

Instancing Transformation

Page 89

CFX-Post Create Menu

The next step involves creating an XY plane (called Plane 1) at X= -1 and Z=1. For information on creating planes, please see Plane (p. 51). After clicking on the panel to expand the Reflection sub-menu, reflection is applied on Plane 1.

Page 90

Instancing Transformation

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Legend
Legends can be plotted in the viewer to show the relevance of plotted colours and give an approximate quantitative prediction of variable values on a locator. Select Create>Legend or click on the icon in the toolbar. For more information about the valid CCL parameters for a Legend, see LEGEND (p. 285 in CFX-Post). Legend: Definition
Select the name of the object to create a Legend for. Set the x and y-position of the Legend. If None is selected you should enter an x or y-position for the Legend. The Position values represent a fraction of the Viewer width from the left side for x-position, or a fraction of the Viewer height from the bottom for y-position.

Toggle visibility on or off.

Click here to create the legend.

 More Help:
Legend (p. 91 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) LEGEND (p. 285 in CFX-Post)

To create a Legend first select the name of the plot. CFX-Post will automatically find the units associated with the selected plot. The exact position of the plot can be changed by entering values in the Legend Position box, or using the embedded sliders. You can set the X and Y justification of the plot to None, Centre, Left and Right. The Appearance of the Legend can be changed by clicking on the Appearance tab (Legend: Appearance (p. 92))

CFX-5.5.1

Legend

Page 91

CFX-Post Create Menu

Legend: Appearance
Sets the size of the Legend as a fraction of the Viewer height. Higher values increase both the size and width of the Legend. The Legend Aspect controls the width of the colour range bar displayed with the Legend. Select the accuracy of values that will appear on the Legend (number of integers). Choose a scientic or xed number format. Set the number of tick labels shown in the Legend. Set the font used for the tick labels and the title displayed with the Legend. Select a colour for the tick labels and title. Toggle visibility on or off.

 More Help:
Click here to create the legend.
Legend: Appearance (p. 92 in CFX-Post) Legend (p. 91 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) LEGEND (p. 285 in CFX-Post)

The height and width of the legend can be changed by entering values (or using the embedded sliders) in the Legend Size and Legend Aspect respectively. You can change the precision of your legend. Changing the Precision number changes the number of integers that will appear on your Legend. You may choose a format of Scientific or Fixed To change text Font select one of the available fonts. Legend Ticks sets the number of graduations (with labels) that will appear on the Legend. For example, for a scale ranging from 0 to 10, setting 3 Ticks will produce graduations at 0, 5 and 10. For a Legend Plot, each number assigned to a contour line will appear on the legend, and its associated variable value.

Page 92

Legend

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Text
Text can be added to the viewer e.g. for annotation or comments in CFX-Post. Select Create>Text or click on the icon in the toolbar. For more information about valid CCL parameters for a Text object, see TEXT (p. 286 in CFX-Post). Text: Definition
Type the text to be displayed in the Viewer here The Two Coords option positions text at a xed X-Y location in the Viewer. The bottom left corner of the Viewer acts as an origin. See below for the Three Coords option Enter the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) position for the text in the Viewer. If None is selected you can use the Position boxes to enter the text location as a fraction of the Viewer width or height. The Three Coords option positions text as a xed X-Y-Z location attached to your geometry. It will rotate and translate with the geometry (but always face forward so it is readable). Select the X-Y-Z Position on your geometry to attach the text to. Set a Rotation value in degrees. A value of 0 positions the text horizontally reading from left to right.

 More Help:
Text: Definition (p. 93 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) TEXT (p. 286 in CFX-Post)

CFX-5.5.1

Text

Page 93

CFX-Post Create Menu

To create text first enter it into the Text String box. The text can be positioned by defining either 2 or 3 co-ordinates. If the text is defined with a Position Mode of 2 co-ordinates enter its position into the Text Position boxes or use the embedded sliders. The co-ordinates define the X-Y position on the Viewer window. Alternatively, choose an X and/ or Y justification of (None), Centre, Left or Right. When the text is entered with a Position Mode of 3 co-ordinates its 3D position is required. Enter the coordinates into the Text Position boxes or use the embedded sliders. The text can be rotated by entering a value in degrees into the Text Rotation box or using the embedded slider. Click on the Appearance tab for more properties (see Text: Appearance (p. 94)) Text: Appearance

Enter the text height as a fraction of the Viewer height. Click the icon to open the Select Colour panel where you can pick a colour for the text Select a font. Return to the settings last time Apply was pressed. Return all settings to the CFX-Post defaults.

 More Help:
Text: Appearance (p. 94 in CFX-Post) Text: Definition (p. 93 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) TEXT (p. 286 in CFX-Post)

To change the text size enter a value into the Text Height box, or use the embedded slider. Choose a colour by clicking the icon and selecting from the palette and finally select a font from the Font list.

Page 94

Text

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Chart
Charts are designed to produce graphs of a comparison of two variables along a Polyline locator (for more information on Polylines please see (p. 60)). In the example Chart: Example (p. 99) at the end of this section, we use an existing plane to create a Polyline using the Boundary Intersection method. The Polyline can then be used as a useful locator for plotting the velocity profile at the exit of a static mixer. To create a Chart, select Create>Chart or click on the icon in the toolbar. For more information on valid CCL parameters for a Chart, see CHART (p. 289 in CFX-Post) and CHART LINE (p. 290 in CFXPost).

CFX-5.5.1

Chart

Page 95

CFX-Post Create Menu

Chart: Chart Panel

Enter a Title to be displayed when you view the chart. Existing Chart Lines are displayed here. Highlight the lines you want to plot in your chart. You can use the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys to highlight multiple lines. Create a new Chart Line. See Chart Line: Line Panel (p. 98 in CFX-Post) Edit the highlighted Chart Line. See Chart Line: Line Panel (p. 98 in CFX-Post) Delete the highlighted Chart Line. Enter a title for the X axis. Enter a title for the Y axis. Select the axes to display with your chart (note that if your plot lies completely in a single quadrant you may not see any change). Select the Automatic or Manual range option. For the Manual option enter the limits for the X and Y axes. Entering a smaller max than min will invert the chart for that particular axis.

Click Apply to create a chart of the highlighted Chart Lines. A Portable Bitmap (.pbm) le is created. Click View to open a viewer displaying the Chart. You can alter the settings on this panel and click Apply to interactively modify the Chart displayed in the chart viewer.

 More Help:
Chart (p. 95 in CFX-Post) Chart: Example (p. 99 in CFX-Post) Chart Line: Line Panel (p. 98 in CFX-Post) CHART (p. 289 in CFX-Post)

The Chart tab panel is used to define the range and labelling for a Chart and to select the line(s) to plot. To create a new chart you must first define a line to plot on the chart. Click on the icon, or right click in the area displaying the current Chart Lines and select New... to create a new line. The Chart Line: Line Panel (p. 98) window will open up.
Page 96

Chart

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

After you have created the lines you wish to plot, you can create the Chart object by highlighting the lines to include in your Chart and then clicking on the Apply button a Portable Bitmap file (*.pbm) will be created. You can view the Chart bitmap by clicking on the View button. If you wish to modify the Chart bitmap, you can make the required changes and then click Apply to automatically update the Chart Viewer. It should be noted that the default filename Chart.pbm is saved into the temporary directory (please see Options: General (p. 32) for more information about the temporary directory). Chart: Appearance Panel
Enable to display a legend when you view the chart. This will show the line name with the corresponding line colour used on the plot. If Display Legend is enabled, set the distance (as a fraction of the Chart Viewer window width) to place the legend from the right side. Choose a font to use for the chart title, axes labels and legend labels. Choose the text colour for the chart title and axes labels. Pick a colour for the chart Frame (the outside border of your chart and axes numbering labels). Click Apply to create a chart of the lines highlighted on the Chart tab panel. A Portable Bitmap (.pbm) le is created. Click View to open a viewer displaying the Chart. You can alter the settings on this panel and click Apply to interactively modify the Chart displayed in the chart viewer.

 More Help:
Chart: Appearance Panel (p. 97 in CFX-Post) Chart (p. 95 in CFX-Post) Chart: Chart Panel (p. 96 in CFX-Post) Chart: Example (p. 99 in CFX-Post) CHART (p. 289 in CFX-Post)

The Appearance tab panel allows you to include a legend on your Chart and select other appearance properties. A legend will display the name of each line in your plot along with the line colour shown next to the name. This can be useful when plotting multiple lines on a Chart.
Chart

CFX-5.5.1

Page 97

CFX-Post Create Menu

Chart Line: Line Panel

Enter a name for the chart line. This name will appear in the legend if you select to display one.

Select the Polyline Locator to create your Chart Line from. You cannot select more than one Locator. Pick a variable to plot along the X-Axis. The variable value at each point on the Polyline Locator will be plotted against the Y-Axis variable. Pick a variable to plot along the Y-Axis. The variable value at each point on the Polyline Locator will be plotted against the X-Axis variable.

 More Help:
Chart Line: Line Panel (p. 98 in CFX-Post) Chart: Chart Panel (p. 96 in CFX-Post) Chart (p. 95 in CFX-Post) Chart: Example (p. 99 in CFX-Post) CHART LINE (p. 290 in CFX-Post)

The Chart Line window is used to create lines to plot in your Chart. You should complete the form as follows: Enter a name for your Chart Line, this will be used to identify the line in a legend. Choose a Polyline Locator for your Chart Line. The points on a Polyline are numbered consecutively from the start to the end of the line making them suitable for producing Chart Lines. Select the plot variables for your X and Y axes. You can select Chart Count to plot a variable against the point numbers on your Polyline. The Polyline point numbers are integers starting from zero. Note that this is not the distance from the start of the Polyline if the sampling points along your Polyline are concentrated in a particular area this will not be reflected in your Chart. You can plot the X, Y or Z variables on one axis to obtain a plot of a variable versus distance.
Page 98

Chart

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

To set appearance properties for your line click on the Appearance tab (for details please see Chart Line: Appearance Panel (p. 99)) Chart Line: Appearance Panel The Chart Line Appearance panel allows you to control the line and symbol settings for your Chart Line.

Toggle the visibility of the Chart Line on or off. Select a line colour from the list or pick Auto colouring. Select a line style from the list. Enable to display a symbol at the data points used to produce the Chart Line. Select a colour for the symbol from the list or pick Auto colouring. Select from a list of symbol styles

 More Help:
Chart Line: Line Panel (p. 98 in CFX-Post) Chart (p. 95 in CFX-Post) Chart Line: Appearance Panel (p. 99 in CFX-Post) Chart: Example (p. 99 in CFX-Post) CHART LINE (p. 290 in CFX-Post)

Chart: Example In this example a Polyline will be created along a diameter of the exit (in the X-axis direction) of the Static Mixer tutorial example. You can use a results file obtained from Tutorial 1 (p. 11 in CFX-5 Tutorials), Tutorial 2 (p. 85 in CFX-5 Tutorials) or the results file <CFXROOT>/ examples/5.5.1/StaticMixer.res. The Polyline locator will be used to construct a chart showing the velocity profile in this region.

CFX-5.5.1

Chart

Page 99

CFX-Post Create Menu

Create a Plane using the point and normal method. Select the Point to be (0,0,0) and the Normal as (0,1,0) so that the Plane is normal to the Y-axis. For detailed information on Planes, please see Plane: Geometry (p. 51). Create a Polyline using the Boundary Intersection method. Use the outlet (coloured white in the image below) as the Boundary List and the Plane you just created in the Location box. For detailed information on Polylines, please see Polyline: Geometry (p. 60).

Create a new Chart by clicking on the Chart icon. Enter a name for the Chart. In the Object Editor click on Enter a name for the New Line. Select the Polyline you just created as the Locator. Select the variable X to plot along the X-axis. The X coordinate direction is parallel to the Polyline in this example so the plot will show a variable profile across the outlet.
Page 100

to bring up the Chart Line window.

Chart

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Select Velocity as the Y axis variable. Leave the settings for Appearance at their default values. Click OK to close the Chart Line window. In the Chart window, enter Velocity Profile at Outlet as the Title. Enter X in the X Axis Label box and Velocity in the Y Axis Label box. Click on the line name to highlight it then press Apply. A Chart of the highlighted lines will be created as a Portable Bitmap file. To view the Chart, click View (see the Chart Viewer below). You can save a chart by selecting File>Save Image As from the Chart Viewer main menu, then selecting a file format. The Chart Viewer The Chart Viewer is launched whenever a created chart is viewed. Once inside the chart viewer you can save the current chart in a variety of formats by selecting File>Save image from the menu bar. Previously saved charts can be loaded into the Viewer by selecting File>Open. The Edit menu allows you to copy and paste, rotate, flip and convert the image between 1, 8 and 32 bit formats. The Options menu contains more functionality; you can change the colour and dither properties of your image, as well as the scale and colour context.

CFX-5.5.1

Chart

Page 101

CFX-Post Create Menu

Page 102

Chart

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Wireframe
The Wireframe object contains the surface mesh for your geometry and is created as a default object when you load a file into CFX-Post. You can change how much of the surface mesh you wish to see by altering the Edge Angle (see following section) and change the line thickness and colour. You cannot create additional Wireframe objects. Wireframe:Definition

The Edge Angle is the angle between one edge of a mesh face and its neighbouring face. Setting an Edge Angle in CFX-Post will dene a minimum angle for drawing parts of the surface mesh. For example, if an edge angle of 30 degrees was chosen, any edges shared by faces with an angle between them of 30 degrees or more will be drawn. Reducing the Edge Angle will show more of the Surface Mesh in the Viewer. Select a Colour and a width (in pixels) for the Wireframe lines. Click to Apply Instancing.

Select an Instancing Transform from the list. You will need to rst create an instancing transform before you can apply it to an object. Please see Instancing Transformation (p. 86 in CFX-Post) for more information.

 More Help:
Wireframe (p. 103 in CFX-Post) Create Menu (p. 43 in CFX-Post) WIREFRAME (p. 246 in CFX-Post) Instancing Transformation (p. 86 in CFX-Post)

To change how much of the wireframe is drawn, you can change the edge angle. The Edge Angle is the angle between one edge of a mesh face and its neighbouring face. Setting an Edge Angle in CFX-Post will define a minimum angle for drawing parts of the surface mesh. For example, if an edge angle of 30 degrees was chosen, any edges shared by faces with an angle between them of 30 degrees or more will be drawn. The visibility of the wireframe can be toggled on and off by clicking on the check-mark.
CFX-5.5.1

Wireframe

Page 103

CFX-Post Create Menu

Instancing transforms are created separately in the Create menu. For information on creating instancing transforms, please see Instancing Transformation (p. 86). The option Apply Instancing is selected by default and Default Transform is selected. To apply a different transform, first create it using the Create Menu and then select it from the list. Click Apply to create the transformation.

Page 104

Wireframe

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Create Menu

Boundary and Subdomain

The Boundary and Subdomain object types are default objects defined during pre-processing and created in CFX-Post when a file is loaded. You cannot create additional Boundary or Subdomain objects during post-processing, or delete the existing ones. A Boundary object will exist for each boundary condition defined in CFX-Build. Any surfaces of your geometry which were not specifically assigned a boundary condition will appear in a single Boundary object named Default. If you have created any Thin Surface boundary conditions, then each will have two locators defined by default. These locators will be named with the same names as the relevant boundary condition in CFX-Build followed by a 1 or a 2. One default locator is created for each side of each Thin Surface. If you have a complex geometry which has a large region of default boundary condition, it may be worth defining named boundary conditions on parts of this surface within CFX-Build, even though you still apply the default boundary condition to this named surface. You will then have convenient boundary objects created in CFX-Post upon which you can view variables when you come to view the results. Subdomain objects will only exist if a Fluid Subdomain was defined during pre-processing (Solid Subdomains appear as a separate Domain). You can edit both the Colour and Render properties of Boundary and Subdomain objects. See Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118) and Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121) for details.

CFX-5.5.1

Boundary and Subdomain

Page 105

CFX-Post Create Menu

Page 106

Boundary and Subdomain

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

Viewer Menu
Introduction (p. 108) Viewer Menu Items (p. 109)

CFX-5.5.1

Page 107

CFX-Post Viewer Menu

Introduction
The Viewer Menu contains many of the features that control the way in which the viewer works. All of the viewer menu items are action options which in some way manipulate the viewer or the objects within.
Viewing Mode Picking Mode Highlighting Perspective Orthographic Views Fit View Restore Camera View New Camera View

Change the current mode to Viewing Mode. Change the current mode to Picking Mode. Turn highlighting for objects on and off. Look at objects using a perspective view mode. Look at objects using an orthographic view mode. Select from a list of preset view orientations. Change the size of objects to fit in the viewer in a central position. Recall a previously saved camera view. Create a new camera and save the current view to that camera.

Save Camera View Set the current view to the currently selected camera. Delete Camera View Camera Views Clipping Planes

Delete the selected camera. The view can no longer be recalled. Select from a list of saved camera views. Select from a list of clipping planes or deactivate clipping.

Page 108

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Viewer Menu

Viewer Menu Items

Viewing Mode Sets the viewer mode to Viewing Mode. Mouse actions such as zoom, rotate etc are effective during viewing mode. Picking Mode Sets the viewer mode to Picking Mode. Picking mode can be used to select and/or drag certain objects in the viewer. Selecting Objects The mouse is used to select objects (e.g. points, boundaries,...) from the Viewer. When a number of objects overlap, the one closest to the camera is picked. Moving Objects Point, Plane and Line objects can be moved in the viewer by dragging and dropping the object to a new location. When an object is moved, its definition is updated in the Object Editor. Any other plots that are located on these movable objects are automatically updated. Highlighting This sets the highlighting mode on or off. The current object selected in the Object Selector is highlighted with a red box. Perspective Activates the Perspective mode of viewing objects. Orthographic Activates the Orthographic mode of viewing objects.

CFX-5.5.1

Viewer Menu Items

Page 109

CFX-Post Viewer Menu

Views Enables you to select one of the preset views illustrated in the figure below.

Fit View Fit View will change the size of the objects in the viewer to make them fully visible in the centre of the viewer. Restore Camera View Restore Camera View has the effect of restoring the view saved under the currently selected camera. Please see Camera Settings (p. 125) for further details. New Camera View New Camera View will create a new camera and save the current view to that camera. Please see Camera Settings (p. 125) for further details. Save Camera View Saves the current view to the currently selected camera. It will overwrite the previous view settings for that camera. Please see Camera Settings (p. 125) for further details. Delete Camera View Erases the current camera from memory.
Page 110

Viewer Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Viewer Menu

Camera Views Shows a list of cameras; the current camera is highlighted with a checkmark. Click on a different camera to change from one camera to another. Please see Camera Settings (p. 125) for further details. Clipping Planes Shows a list of created clip planes. The currently active clip plane is highlighted with a check mark. To change clipping settings click on a new clip plane or to deactivate, click on No Clipping.

CFX-5.5.1

Viewer Menu Items

Page 111

CFX-Post Viewer Menu

Page 112

Viewer Menu Items

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

Tools Menu
Introduction (p. 114) Object Selector (p. 115) Object Editor (p. 116) Viewer (p. 124) Calculator (p. 127) Mesh Calculator (p. 138) Animation (p. 141) Timestep Selector (p. 148) Expressions (p. 149) Variables (p. 151) Command Editor (p. 157) Macro Calculator (p. 158) Arrange (p. 162)

CFX-5.5.1

Page 113

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Introduction
The Tools menu controls which windows are currently visible in the CFX-Post display. Windows which are currently visible in the display have a checkmark or depressed button (depending on the Graphical User Interface (GUI) style) alongside them in the Tools menu. Clicking on any of the available windows in the list will toggle the visibility of the selected window on or off. The height of any window can be adjusted by holding the mouse pointer over to top or bottom edge and dragging the window to the required height. The width of the Viewer window can be adjusted in a similar way, but the width of other windows is fixed by the font used in the GUI. Each window can be moved by dragging the window bar, and minimised or closed using the controls located on the right side of the window bar. The windows will snap into position when dragged close to the edges of the display area in the GUI. The position of each window is saved at the end of your session and reloaded next time you start CFX-Post. You can restore the default window layout by selecting Tools>Arrange from the main menu bar.
Object Selector Object Editor Viewer Calculator Animation

Lists the current objects for selection or editing. Change the properties of an object. Displays the geometry and objects created in CFX-Post. Quantitative data analysis. Create and view animation sequences. Write MPEGs for viewing in MPEG players.

Timestep Selector Choose a timestep for a transient run. Expressions Variables Command Editor Macro Calculator Arrange

Define expressions to use in CFX-Post. Create new variables and modify existing variables. Edit objects using CFX Command Language. Use predefined macros for quantitative post-processing. Arrange the windows in CFX-Post.

Page 114

Introduction

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Object Selector
Click on the Name or Type button to toggle the ordering of the lists (either A-Z or Z-A). You can use the Filter to list only specic object types in the Object Selector. Create a new object. Edit the highlighted object. Delete the highlighted object. Delete is disabled for system dened object (Boundaries, Wireframe e.t.c.) Right-clicking on an object brings up this menu: New...: opens the New Object panel where you can enter a name and select the type of object to create. Edit: displays the selected object in the Object Editor panel. Delete: deletes the selected object Edit in Command Editor: opens the Command Editor window and displays the denition of the object and its parameter settings. You can edit the settings to change the object.

Toggle object visibility using the check-box

 More Help:
Object Selector (p. 115 in CFX-Post) Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) CFX Command Language (p. 163 in CFX-Post)

The Object Selector window initially contains a list of objects that were created when the problem was defined (e.g. Boundaries and Subdomains). New objects that you create will appear in the Object Selector window. Clicking on either of the Name and Type buttons will toggle between alphabetically ordered lists and reverse alphabetical order lists. The Filter allows you to list only particular types of graphic objects (e.g. only boundaries) at any one time. Right-clicking on any of the objects will display a pop-up menu which will allow you to edit the definition of the object, delete the object or create a new object. You can also edit the object by double-clicking on the object Name or Type, or clicking on the Edit icon when the object is highlighted. To the left of each object that can be viewed is a visibility toggle. Checking the box will turn on visibility for that object.
CFX-5.5.1

Object Selector

Page 115

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Object Editor
The Object Editor window is used to define or edit the properties of an object. For most objects the window contains three tabs Geometry, Colour and Render. For some objects only one or two of these tabs are available, while for others, tabs unique to that object are used. Clicking on each of the tabs displays the tab panel associated with each area. The options available in each of the tab panels will depend upon which graphic object is selected. For example, when changing the properties of an Isosurface, the Geometry tab will allow specification of the domain, the variable and the value to be plotted. The widgets located at the bottom of the Object Editor window are available from any of the tabs. A description of each widget follows: The Visibility toggle can be enabled or disabled to display or hide objects in the Viewer. The Apply button commits the changes made to all the tab panels and updates the object in the Viewer. Objects which depend on the edited Object are also updated (for example, altering a Plane would also change a which uses that Plane).

The Reset button returns the settings for the object to those stored in the database. The settings are stored in the database each time the Apply button is pressed. The Defaults button restores the system default setting. Object Editor: Geometry Tab Definition of the geometry is unique for each graphic object and as a result is discussed in detail for each object in File Menu (p. 9). The basic procedures for geometry setup involve defining the size and location of the object, with most other properties being object specific. Options which are common to several of the Geometry definition tab panels are described here.

Page 116

Object Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Selecting Domains For Point, Plane, Volume Isosurface, Polyline, Surface and Vector objects you can select the Domains in which the object should exist. To select the domain pick a domain name from the drop-down Domains menu. To define the object in more than one domain, you can type in the names of the domains separated by commas. Domains created in CFX-Build containing a Solid Subdomains are actually written to the Results file as two separate domains. Therefore Solid Subdomains are available in CFX-Post in the Domains list, and Fluid Domains will not contain Solid Subdomains. When more than one domain has been used for a GGI simulation (requiring GGI connections in the problem definition), most plotting functions can be applied to the entire computational domain, or to a specific named domain.

CFX-5.5.1

Object Editor

Page 117

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Object Editor: Colour Tab

Sets the colour Mode to Constant, Variable or, for some objects, Use Plot Variable. The Variable options colours the object based on the selected Variable value at each point on the object. Use Plot Variable sets this Variable to be the same as that used on the Geometry Tab Panel. Select the Variable with which to colour the object. Set the Range option to Global, Local or User Specied. See Range (p. 119 in CFX-Post) for details. Select whether to plot Hybrid or Conservative values. For an explanation of these terms please see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values (p. 153 in CFX-Post) Pick a colour for any locations on the object where variable values do not exist, see Undefined Colour (p. 120 in CFX-Post). Press Apply to create or modify the object. Return to the settings stored in the database for this entire object (not just this panel). Return to the CFX-Post default settings.

 More Help:
Object Editor: Geometry Tab (p. 116 in CFX-Post) Object Editor: Render Tab (p. 121 in CFX-Post) Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) Colour (p. 305 in CFX-Post)

The colour options control the colour of graphic objects in the Viewer. The colouring can be either constant or based on a variable, and can be selected from the Mode pull-down menu. Mode: Constant To specify a single colour for an object, you should select the Constant option from the Mode pull-down menu. To choose a colour, click on the icon to the right of the Colour widget and select one of the available colours.

Page 118

Object Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Mode: Variable and Use Plot Variable You may wish to plot a variable on an object, e.g. Temperature on a Plane. To do this, you should select the Variable option from the Mode pull-down menu. This will display additional options, including the Variable pull-down menu where you can choose the variable you wish to plot. The list of variables will contain User Level 1 variables only. These are defined in CFX-Build; for a complete list of variables and their user levels, please see List of Variables (p. 134 in CFX-5 Solver and Solver Manager). For a full list of variables, click on the icon. For Isosurface and Vector plot, the Use Plot Variable option is also available. This sets the Variable used to colour your plot to the same as that used to define it. Range The Range widget allows you to plot over the Global, Local or User Specified range of a variable. This will affect the variation of colour used when plotting the object in the Viewer. The lowest values of a variable in the selected range are shown in blue in the Viewer, the highest values are shown in red. The Global range option uses the variable values from the results in all domains (regardless of the domains selected on the Geometry tab panel) and all timesteps (when applicable) to determine the minimum and maximum values. The Local range option uses only the variable values on the current object at the current timestep to set the maximum and minimum range values. This option is useful to utilise the full colour range on an object. The User Specified range option allows you to specify your own maximum and minimum range values. This can be used to concentrate the full colour range in a specific variable range. Hybrid/Conservative Select whether the object you wish to plot will be based on hybrid or conservative values. For an explanation of these terms, please see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values (p. 153).
Object Editor

CFX-5.5.1

Page 119

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Undefined Colour Any areas in which the results can not be plotted because the variable is not defined (e.g. when a section of an object lies outside of the computational domain) will use the colour specified in the Undef. Colour box. Clicking the icon to the right of this box will allow you to change the undefined colour. Values written to the Results file as zeros will be coloured as such and will not be undefined (e.g. Yplus and Wall Shear values away from a wall boundary).

Page 120

Object Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Object Editor: Render Tab

Set the transparency value for the faces of the object. Enter a value between 0 (opaque) and 1 (transparent) or use the embedded slider. Select a Shading setting. Options available are: None - colours the object black. Flat Shading - each face is a constant colour. Smooth Shading - colours are interpolated between points. Toggle Specular Lighting of the object on or off. Toggle Lighting of the object on or off. Toggle Culling (turning off visibility) for the Front or Back of the Object, or select No Culling. Note that images will not appear with face culling unless the Screen Capture mode is used,. Toggle Draw Lines on to display the lines connecting the points on the object. Enter a Line Width between 1 and 99. You can use the graduated arrows, the embedded slider or type in a value. Pick a line colour. Click to Apply Instancing. Select an Instancing Transform from the list. You will need to rst create an instancing transform before you can apply it to an object. Please see Instancing Transformation (p. 86 in CFX-Post) for more information.

Press Apply to conrm the settings. Return to the settings stored in the database.

 More Help:
Object Editor: Colour Tab (p. 118 in CFX-Post) Object Editor: Geometry Tab (p. 116 in CFX-Post) Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) Instancing Transformation (p. 86 in CFX-Post) INSTANCE TRANSFORM (p. 282 in CFX-Post) DEFAULT INSTANCE TRANSFORM (p. 281 in CFX-Post)

The appearance of the Render tab panel will depend on what type of object is plotted in the viewer.

CFX-5.5.1

Object Editor

Page 121

CFX-Post Tools Menu

The top half of the panel controls the Draw Faces options. This toggle is enabled by default and draws the faces of the elements which make up an object. The faces are coloured using the settings on the Colour tab panel. The transparency of an object can be altered by entering a value for transparency using the embedded slider or keyboard input. Values between 0 and 1 are valid, 0 corresponding to completely opaque and 1 corresponding to completely transparent. Shading Shading properties can be changed to either None, Flat Shading or Smooth Shading. None: no shading is applied to the object, i.e. it appears black. Flat Shading: each element is coloured a constant colour. Colour interpolation is not used across or between elements. Smooth Shading: Colour interpolation is applied which results in colour variation across an element based on the colour of surrounding elements. Lighting Lighting can be turned on and off by checking/unchecking the Lighting toggle. Specular lighting, when enabled, treats the object as a reflector of light. Culling Object Culling allows you to turn off visibility for element faces of objects that either face the viewer or point away from the viewer. Domain boundaries always have a normal vector that points out of the domain. The two sides of a thin surface have normal vectors that point towards each other. Selecting Front will turn off visibility for all outward-facing element faces (the faces on the same side as the normal vector). This would, for example, turn off visibility for one side of a plane or the outward facing elements of a cylinder locator. When applied to a volume object, the first layer of element faces that point outwards are rendered invisible. You will usually want to use this option when viewing values on thin surface boundaries.
Page 122

Object Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

This is useful when rendering thin surfaces (turning on face culling for both surfaces will produce clear plots for both sides). Selecting Back will turn off visibility for inward-facing element faces (the faces on the opposite side to the normal vector). When applied to volume objects, the effect of back culling is not always visible in the viewer, since the object elements that face the outward will obscure the culled faces. It can, however, reduce the render time when further actions are performed on the object. The effect of this would be most noticeable for large volume objects. In the same way as for Front Face culling, it will turn off visibility of one side of surface locators. No culling turns visibility for all element faces back on. Note that Face Culling affects printouts performed using use Screen Capture method only. Draw Lines can be activated to show the edge lines of the elements in an object. The line width can be changed by entering a value in the Line Width between 1 and 99. When the box is active the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard can be used to increment the value. Line colour can be changed by clicking on the icon to the right of the Colour box and selecting a colour. Applying Instancing Transforms to objects Instancing transforms are created separately in the Create menu. For information on creating instancing transforms, please see Instancing Transformation (p. 86). The option Apply Instancing is selected by default and Default Transform is selected. To apply a different transform, first create it using the Create Menu and then select it from the list. Click Apply to create the transformation.

CFX-5.5.1

Object Editor

Page 123

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Viewer

Set Clipping option. No Clipping is the default option. When you create Clip Plane objects they are added to this menu. Delete current camera view Save the current view to the selected camera. Create a new camera to store a view in. Viewer manipulation icons. For details please see Viewer Manipulation (p. 125 in CFX-Post) Switch between Perspective and Orthographic views. Enable highlight mode to highlight the object shown in the Object Editor. Switch between Viewing and Picking mode. Use Viewing mode to rotate, zoom and pan the view. Use Picking mode to select objects from the Viewer. Select a camera view. Return to the view stored in the selected camera.

 More Help:
Camera Settings (p. 125 in CFX-Post) Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) VIEWER (p. 273 in CFX-Post) CAMERA (p. 284 in CFX-Post)

The Viewer is the window in which the graphics object will appear. Whenever the Viewer is maximised to fill the display, the other windows automatically assume an always on top status so that the viewer does not obscure them.

Page 124

Viewer

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Viewer Manipulation There are a number of icons along the top of the viewer which can change the view orientation and change between object picking and viewing modes.
Icon Description Sets the Viewer into Viewing Mode. The mouse is used to rotate, zoom and pan the view. Sets the Viewer into Picking mode. The mouse is used to select objects (e.g. points, boundaries,...) from the Viewer. When a number of objects overlap, the one closest to the camera is picked. Sets the Viewer to look along the positive x axis. Sets the Viewer to look along the negative x axis. Sets the Viewer to look along the positive y axis. Sets the Viewer to look along the negative y axis. Sets the Viewer to look along the positive z axis. Sets the Viewer to look along the negative z axis. Displays the Isometric View. Centres the object in the Viewer.

Camera Settings CFX-Post allows you to save a particular view to a camera object and then restore the view at another time. If you shut down CFX-Post, you can save the cameras and their positions by saving your state. When a desired view is achieved, click on the Save view icon in the viewer toolbar to save the view to the selected Camera object. A single default Camera (called Camera 1) is always available, but a number of different views can be saved by creating additional cameras. To save a view to a different camera, click on the New view icon and enter a name in the New View window. If you wish to return to a saved view,

CFX-5.5.1

Viewer

Page 125

CFX-Post Tools Menu

click on the Restore view icon or select the view from the drop-down menu by clicking the arrow to the right of the current camera name. To delete an unwanted camera view, click on the Delete Camera icon.

Page 126

Viewer

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Calculator
The calculator can be used to provide quantitative information about the results. The Function pull-down menu allows you to select a function to evaluate, the Location menu will list all of the available locators that can be used for the calculation. The Variable list shows all available variables for the calculation.
Select the function from this list. See Function Selection Choose the Location for the calculation. (p. 128 in CFX-Post) for a description of the calculations Only Locations valid for the selected performed by each function. Function will be available. If applicable to the Function, pick a variable from the list. You can click in the box to enter an expression for most Functions. See CFX Expression Language (CEL) (p. 173 in CFX-Post) for information on valid expressions. User Variables are also available, see Variables (p. 151 in CFXPost) for details on creating User Variables. Select the direction if applicable to the Function. For some Functions None is available. See Direction or Axis Selection (p. 128 in CFX-Post) for more details. If applicable to the Function select the Fluid to perform the calculation on. Click to calculate the result Choose whether to base the calculation on Hybrid or Conservative values. See Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values (p. 153 in CFX-Post) for more details.

 More Help:
Function Selection (p. 128 in CFX-Post) CFX Expression Language (CEL) (p. 173 in CFX-Post) CEL Functions, Constants and System Variables (p. 174 in CFX-Post) Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor (p. 201 in CFX-Post) Calculator (p. 127 in CFX-Post) CALCULATOR (p. 291 in CFX-Post) Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post)

For most functions you can click in the Variable box and enter an expression to use as the Variable. The expression can include other Variables and any valid CEL (CFX Expression Language) function (see CEL Functions, Constants and System Variables (p. 174 in CFXPost)), for example abs(Velocity u) could be entered so that the calculation is performed using the absolute values of the variable Velocity u.
CFX-5.5.1

Calculator

Page 127

CFX-Post Tools Menu

For multiphase results you can select which fluids to use in your calculation. This option is available with the force, forceNorm, massFlowAve, massFlow and torque functions. The All Fluids option can be selected to perform the calculation using all the fluids in the results. Important: Most quantitative calculations are best performed using the conservative variable values. An explanation is given in Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values (p. 153 in CFX-Post). Important: There are some important limitations concerning calculations performed on CFX-4 Results Files. For more details please see CFX-4 Results file (p. 11). Direction or Axis Selection Some Functions require a direction to be specified before the calculation can be performed. The use of the direction in the calculation varies between functions. The areaInt function projects the Location onto a plane normal to the specified direction (if the direction is not set to NONE), and then perform the calculation on the projected Location (direction specification can also be None). The direction of the normal vectors for the Location is important and will cancel out for surfaces such as closed surfaces. The force and forceNorm functions calculate the force in the direction specified. The torque function calculates the torque about the selected axis. Function Selection The available quantitative functions are outlined in the table below.
Function Name area (p. 129) areaAve (p. 130) areaInt (p. 130) Operation Area of location Area-weighted average Area-weighted integral (can be projected to a direction)

Page 128

Calculator

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Function Name ave (p. 131) count (p. 132) force (p. 132) forceNorm (p. 133) length (p. 133) lengthAve (p. 134) lengthInt (p. 134) massFlow (p. 134) massFlowAve (p. 134) massFlowInt (p. 135) maxVal (p. 135) minVal (p. 135) probe (p. 135) sum (p. 136) torque (p. 136) volume (p. 136) volumeAve (p. 137) volumeInt (p. 137)

Operation Arithmetic average Number of calculation points Force on a surface in the specied direction Length normalised force on a curve in the specied direction Length of a curve Length-weighted average Length-weighted integration Total mass ow Mass Flow-weighted average Mass Flow-weighted integral Maximum Value Minimum Value Value at a point Sum over the calculation points Torque on a surface about the specied axis Volume of a 3-D location Volume-weighted average Volume-weighted integral

area
The area function is used to calculate the area of a 2-D location. The following example demonstrate use of the function. Function: area, Location: Plane1. This example will calculate the total area of the locator Plane1.

CFX-5.5.1

Calculator

Page 129

CFX-Post Tools Menu

areaAve
The areaAve function calculates the area-weighted average of an expression on a 2-D location. The area-weighted average of a variable is the average value of the variable on a location when the mesh element sizes are taken into account. Without the area weighting function, the average of all the nodal variable values would be biased towards variable values in regions of high mesh density. The following examples demonstrate use of the function. Function: areaAve, Location: outlet, Variable: Velocity. This example will calculate the average magnitude of the Velocity on the outlet location. Note that flow direction is not considered since the magnitude of a vector quantity at each node is calculated. You can use the scalar components of Velocity (e.g. Velocity u) to include a directional sign, for example: Function: areaAve, Location: outlet, Variable: max(Velocity u, 0.0[m s^-1]). This example will calculate the area-weighted average value of Velocity u, with negative values of the variable replaced by zero. Note that this is not the average positive value since zero values will contribute to the average.

areaInt
The areaInt function integrates a variable over the specified 2-D location. To perform the integration over the total face area, the None option should be selected from the Axis drop-down menu. If an direction is selected, the result is an integration over the projected area of each face onto a plane normal to that direction. Each point on a location has an associated area which is stored as vector and therefore has direction. By selecting a Direction in the Function Calculator you are using only a single component of the vector in the area-weighting function. Since these components can be positive or negative, depending on the direction of the normal on the location, it is possible for areas to cancel out. An example of this would be on a closed surface where the projected area will always be zero (the results returned will not in general be zero since the variable values differ over the closed surface). On a flat surface the normal vectors always point in the same direction and will never cancel out. The following examples demonstrates the function.

Page 130

Calculator

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Function: areaInt, Location: Plane1, Variable: Pressure, Direction: None This example integrates Pressure over Plane1. The results returned is the total Pressure force acting on Plane1. The magnitude of each area vector is used and so the direction of the vectors is not considered. Function: areaInt, Location: Plane1, Variable: Pressure, Direction: Global X. This example integrates Pressure over the projected area of Plane1 onto a plane normal to the X-axis. The result is the Pressure force acting in the X-direction on Plane1. This differs slightly from using the force function to calculate the X-directional force on Plane1 the force function includes forces due to the advection of momentum when calculating the force on an internal arbitrary plane or a non-wall boundary (inlets e.t.c.).

ave
The ave function calculates the arithmetic average (the mean value) of a variable or expression on the specified location. This is simply the sum of the values at each node on the location divided by the number of nodes. Results will be biased towards areas of high nodal density on the location. To obtain a mesh independent result you should use the lengthAve, areaAve, volumeAve or massFlowAve functions. The following example demonstrates use of the function. The average of a vector value is calculated as an average of its magnitudes, not the magnitude of component averages. As an example, for velocity,
v1 + v2 v ave = --------------------2

where
vi = ( v xi + v yi + v zi )
2 2 2

CFX-5.5.1

Calculator

Page 131

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Function: ave, Location: MainDomain, Variable: Temperature. This example calculates the mean temperature at all nodes in the selected domain.

count
The count function returns the number of nodes on the specified location. An example is given below. Function: count, Location: MainDomain. This example returns the number of nodes in the specified domain.

force
This function returns the force exerted by the fluid on the specified 2-D locator in the specified Direction. The force on a boundary is calculated using momentum flow data from the Results file. To include the required momentum flow data in your Results file to calculate forces on boundaries, you should set the the option Output Equation Flows to ON on the Solver Control Form in CFX-Build (please see Output Equation Flows (p. 1291 in CFX-Build: Chapter 10) for more information). The result returned for wall boundaries includes pressure and viscous forces acting on the wall. The force on a wall boundary can be positive or negative indicating the Direction of the force. The force on a location other than a wall boundary includes the Pressure force and the force due to the advection of momentum. The result returned is the total force acting on the Location in the specified Direction. At boundaries through which fluid flows (e.g. inlets), the Expert Control Parameter described above must be included to allow the force to be calculated. The results will be equal to the boundary contribution to the momentum flows (these values are printed at the end of a CFX-5 Solver run under the U - Mom, V - Mom and W - Mom headings). A force calculation at an arbitrary internal location (e.g. a Slice Plane) returns the same forces as at a non-wall boundary (forces due to pressure and the advection of momentum). However, the force due to the advection of momentum is approximated and the Expert Control Parameter OUTPUT EQ FLOWS is not needed to perform these calculations.
Page 132

Calculator

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

The force function allows you to select the Fluid(s) to use when performing your calculation. The result returned is the force on the locator due to that fluid. Since the pressure force is the same at each node irrespective of the Fluid choice, the only difference is in the viscous forces (on wall boundaries) or the forces due to the advection of momentum (non-wall boundaries and internal locations). Forces arising as a results of the Reference Pressure are not included in the force calculation. Examples: Function: force, Location: Default, Direction: Global X, Fluid: All Fluids. This will calculate the total force on the Default wall boundaries in the x-direction. Pressure and viscous forces are included. The results file must contain the momentum flux data from the Expert Control Parameter OUTPUT EQ FLOWS. Function: force, Location: inlet1, Direction: Global X, Fluid: Water at RTP. This will calculate the forces on inlet1 due to pressure and the advection of momentum. The results file must contain the momentum flux data from the Expert Control Parameter OUTPUT EQ FLOWS.

forceNorm
Returns the per unit width force on a line in the direction of the specified axis. It is only available for a Polyline created by intersecting a locator on a boundary. Momentum data must also be available. The magnitude of the value returned can be thought of as the force in the specified direction on a Polyline if the Polyline were 2-D with a width of one unit. The forceNorm function allows you to select the Fluid(s) to use when performing your calculation. Example: Function: forceNorm, Location: Polyline1, Direction: Global X, Fluid: All Fluids. The result from this calculation is force per unit width on Polyline1 in the x-direction.

length
Computes the length of the specified line as the sum of the distances between the points making up the line. Example:
CFX-5.5.1

Calculator

Page 133

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Function: length, Location: Polyline1. Calculates the length of the Polyline.

lengthAve
Computes the length-based average of the variable on the specified line. This is the 1-D equivalent of the areaAve function. The results is independent of the nodal distribution along the line since a weighting function assigns a higher weighting to areas of sparse nodal density. Example: Function: lengthAve, Location: Polyline1, Variable: Velocity. This will calculate the average Velocity on the location Polyline1 using a length-based weighting function to account for the distribution of points along the line.

lengthInt
Computes the length-based integral of the variable on the specified line. This is the 1-D equivalent of the areaInt function.

massFlow
Computes the mass flow through the specified 2-D location. The massFlow function allows you to select the Fluid(s) to use when performing your calculation. The result returned is the mass flow of the selected Fluid(s) through the locator. Function: massFlow, Location: outlet2, Fluid: All Fluids. This will calculate the mass flow for all fluids in the domains through the location outlet2.

massFlowAve
Computes the average of a variable on the specified 2-D location and weights each value based on the mass flow assigned to the point on the locator. The massFlowAve function allows you to select the Fluid(s) to use when performing your calculation. The result returned is the average variable value weighted by the mass flow of the selected Fluid(s) assigned to each point on the locator.

Page 134

Calculator

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Function: massFlowAve, Location: Plane1, Variable: Velocity, Fluid: All Fluids This example calculates the average Velocity on Plane1 weighted by the mass flow for all fluids assigned to each point on Plane1.

massFlowInt
This function integrates a variable over the specified 2-D location. A weighting function is applied to the variable value at each point based on the mass flow assigned to that point. You can also specify the Fluid(s) used to calculate the mass flow at each locator point. The following example demonstrates the function. Function: massFlowInt, Location: Plane1, Variable: Pressure, Fluid: All Fluids This example integrates Pressure over Plane1. The result is the Pressure force acting on Plane1 weighted by the mass flow assigned to each point on Plane1.

maxVal
Returns the maximum value of the specified variable on the specified locator. You should create a User Variable if you want to find the maximum value of an expression. Function: maxVal, Location: Default, Variable: Yplus. This will return the maximum Yplus value on the Default wall boundaries.

minVal
Returns the minimum value of the specified variable on the specified locator. You should create a User Variable if you want to find the minimum value of an expression. Example: Function: minVal, Location: MainDomain, Variable: Temperature. These settings will return the minimum Temperature in the domain.

probe
Returns the value of the specified variable on the specified Point Object. Example:

CFX-5.5.1

Calculator

Page 135

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Function: probe, Location: Point1, Variable: Density. Returns the density value at Point1. Important: This calculation should only be performed for point locators described by single points. Incorrect solutions will be produced for multiple point locators.

sum
Computes the sum of the specified variable values at each point on the specified location. Example: Function: sum, Location: SubDomain1, Variable: Volume of Finite Volume. Returns the sum of the Finite Volumes assigned to each node in the location SubDomain1. In this case this sums to the volume of the subdomain.

torque
Returns the torque on a 2-D locator about the specified axis. The force calculated during evaluation of the torque function has the same behaviour as the force function (see force (p. 132)). You can select the Fluid(s) to perform your calculation with, the result returned in the torque on the location due to the selected Fluid(s). To include the required momentum flow data in your Results file to calculate torques, you should set the the option Output Equation Flows to ON on the Solver Control Form in CFX-Build (please see Output Equation Flows (p. 1291 in CFX-Build: Chapter 10) for more information). Function: torque, Location: Plane1, Axis: Global Z, Fluid: .All Fluids. This example calculates the torque on Plane1 about the z-axis due to all fluids in the domain.

volume
The volume function is used to calculate the volume of a 3-D location. Example:

Page 136

Calculator

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Function: volume, Location: Volume1. Returns the sum of the volumes of each mesh element included in the location Volume1.

volumeAve
The volumeAve function calculates the volume-weighted average of an expression on a 3-D location. This is the 3-D equivalent of the areaAve function. The volume-weighted average of a variable is the average value of the variable on a location weighted by the volume assigned to each point on a location. Without the volume weighting function, the average of all the nodal variable values would be biased towards values in regions of high mesh density. The following examples demonstrates use of the function. Function: volumeAve, Location: Volume1, Variable: Density. This example calculates the volume-weighted average value of Density in the region enclosed by the location Volume1.

volumeInt
The volumeInt function integrates the specified variable over the volume location. This is the 3-D equivalent of the areaInt function. Example: Function: volumeInt, Location: Volume1, Variable: Density. This will calculate the integral of density (the total mass) in Volume1.

CFX-5.5.1

Calculator

Page 137

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Mesh Calculator
The mesh calculator offers a variety of tools to check the quality of your mesh. The results of each calculation are printed to the output window. Each calculated variable is also added to the list of available variables, which allows you to use them as a basis for creating new plots. It is important to note that these variables are evaluated on nodes rather than elements, based on the criteria described below.
Select a function to calculate. Options available are: Maximum Face Angle (p. 138 in CFX-Post) Minimum Face Angle (p. 138 in CFX-Post) Edge Length Ratio (p. 139 in CFX-Post) Connectivity Number (p. 139 in CFX-Post) Element Volume Ratio (p. 139 in CFX-Post) Mesh Statistics (p. 139 in CFX-Post) The output window contains the results of the specied calculation. If the calculated variable does not already exist, it will be created. This will allow you to create plots of the calculated variable.

 More Help:
Mesh Calculator (p. 138 in CFX-Post) Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) MESH CALCULATOR (p. 294 in CFX-Post)

Maximum Face Angle This is the greatest face angle for all faces that touch the node. For each face, the angle between the two edges of the face that touch the node is calculated. The largest angle from all faces is returned. The maximum face angle can be considered to be a measure of skewness. Minimum Face Angle This is the smallest face angle for all faces that touch the node.
Page 138

Mesh Calculator

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Edge Length Ratio This is a ratio of the longest edge of a face divided by the shortest edge of the face. For each face,
max ( l 1, l 2 ) -------------------------min ( l 1, l 2 )

is calculated for the two edges of the face that touch the node. The largest ratio is returned. Connectivity Number Connectivity number is the number of elements that touch a node. Element Volume Ratio Element Volume Ratio is defined as the ratio of the maximum volume of an element that touches a node, to the minimum volume of an element that touches a node. The value returned can be used as a measure of the local expansion factor. Mesh Statistics The Mesh Statistics option will return the number of nodes and elements in your volume mesh. It will also list the number of elements of each element type. As an example, the mesh for the following output contained two domains, one using hexahedral elements and the other containing tetrahedral elements. The domains were connected using a GGI interface:
Number of Nodes: 71680 Number of Elements: 139862 Tetrahedra: 75265 Wedges: 31395 Pyramids: 0 Hexahedra: 33202

CFX-5.5.1

Mesh Calculator

Page 139

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Mesh Visualisation Advice The following table gives some guidelines for checking mesh quality. If there are elements which have mesh quality parameters greater or less than those listed, you may find problems with using the mesh in the CFX-5 Solver
Element Type Tetrahedrons (4 nodes) Elements may be a problem if they have any of: Edge Length Ratio > 100 Max Face Angle > 170 Min Face Angle < 1 Element Volume Ratio > 5 Connectivity Number < 50 Edge Length Ratio > 100 Max Face Angle > 170 Min Face Angle < 1 Element Volume Ratio > 5 Edge Length Ratio > 100 Max Face Angle > 170 Min Face Angle < 1 Element Volume Ratio > 5 Connectivity Number < 12 Edge Length Ratio > 100 Max/Min Edge Length > 100 Min Face Angle < 10 Element Volume Ratio > 5 Connectivity Number < 24

Pyramids (5 nodes)

Prisms (6 nodes)

Hexahedrons (8 nodes)

Page 140

Mesh Calculator

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Animation
In CFX-Post Keyframes are used to produce animations. Keyframes define the start and end points of each section of animation. Keyframes are linked together by drawing a number of intermediate frames, the number of which is set in the Animation Editor. The basic approach to creating an animation sequence is to configure the problem in a particular state and then save this state as a Keyframe.. Next, change one or more aspects of the problem state, for example change the viewer orientation by rotating the viewer object. You can then save this state as a second Keyframe. Animations are created by interpolating the change in state of the viewer position, linearly, between Keyframe states. By default, 10 frames are created between Keyframe states, but this is easily adjustable. If the camera position changes between keyframes, the view is interpolated between the two positions at each frame. Every widget and button that is accessible when Animation is active will increment by one for each of the ten frames between the two states. For example, if one key frame has 10 contour levels, and the next has 20 contour levels, then the number of contour levels will increment by one for each of the ten frames between the two states. Objects that are binary in state are toggled at the end of the Keyframe sequence (for example visibility of an object).
Note: If you have 2 keyframes with 10 frames between them, there are a total of 11 steps between keyframes.

CFX-5.5.1

Animation

Page 141

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Animation Editor
The Control buttons located at the top of the panel are described in Animation Editor: Control buttons (p. 145 in CFX-Post) Select Loop or Bounce as the Looping type. Bounce plays backwards and forwards, Loop plays only forwards Select how many cycles the loop will contain or choose Innite for continuous looping Select Animate Camera if you want the camera to move with the animation. Check to create an MPEG le while playing the animation. Browse to a directory using the MPEG File box to specify the location of the saved le Choose a frame increment. (e.g a frame increment of 2 will play every second frame). Create a new Keyframe Edit a Keyframe Set current state to the selected Keyframe Change the order of Keyframes to be played by highlighting one and moving it up or down. Delete the selected Keyframe When a keyframe is selected, changing this value and clicking on the Set Keyframe option will change the number of frames between the selected Keyframe and the next.

 More Help:
Opens the options panel. Load or Save a previously created animation. All Keyframes and settings can be saved as a .can le and reloaded when needed.
Animation Editor (p. 142 in CFX-Post) Animation Editor: Options panel (p. 146 in CFX-Post) Animation Editor: Control buttons (p. 145 in CFX-Post) Animation (p. 141 in CFX-Post) ANIMATION (p. 278 in CFX-Post)

The basic steps to creating an animation are as follows:

Page 142

Animation

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Once you have manipulated the GUI into a chosen start position, click on the icon to set the current state as Keyframe 1. The Keyframe becomes visible in the Keyframe Creation and Editing window.

Change the viewer and/or object parameters to obtain the second required state and click the icon to create Keyframe 2. When you click on a Keyframe to highlight it, the other options to the right of the keyframe list become active. To display the highlighted Keyframe in the viewer, click on the Edit Keyframe icon or double-click on the keyframe itself. To apply changes in the viewer to the highlighted Keyframe, click on the Set Keyframe button. If more than 2 Keyframes exist and you wish to change their order, you can move a Keyframe up and down by clicking on the green arrows. To delete a Keyframe, click on the icon. Clicking on any Keyframe except the final one will allow you to set the number of intermediate interpolated frames in the # of Frames box. After a second Keyframe has been created, the top of the panel becomes available to set further options. The Looping option allows you to specify whether you want the animation to play in one direction during each Cycle or play forwards and backwards. For example, selecting 3 Cycles on the Loop setting will play the animation 3 times, jumping from the last Keyframe back to the first at the end of the first two cycles. Selecting Bounce for the same number of Cycles will cause the animation to play forwards, then backwards before playing forwards once more. The Animate Camera feature toggles whether the camera position is moved (interpolated) with the animation. If it is switched off and Keyframes have different camera positions, everything else will be animated except for the camera.

CFX-5.5.1

Animation

Page 143

CFX-Post Tools Menu

When Save Animation Movie is toggled and a file specified in the MPEG file box, the animation is saved to an MPEG file the next time that the Play button is pressed. To select a file, click on the icon and browse to a convenient location. Click Save to set the filename.

Browse to a convenient directory for saving the MPEG.

Enter the name of the le. You should save the le as a .mpg type.

 More Help:
Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) Animation (p. 141 in CFX-Post) Animation Editor (p. 142 in CFX-Post)

The Frame Incr. box sets how many frames to increment when the animation is played. Setting the value to 2 would cause every second frame to be played. You can load or save your animation state as a .can (CFX Animation) file. It saves the current status of all of the animation settings.

Browse to a convenient directory to load the le. Enter the name of the le or select it using the mouse and click Load..

 More Help:
Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) Animation (p. 141 in CFX-Post) Animation Editor (p. 142 in CFX-Post)

Page 144

Animation

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Browse to a convenient directory to save the le.

Enter the name of the le. You should save the le as a .can (CFX Animation) type.

 More Help:
Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) Animation (p. 141 in CFX-Post) Animation Editor (p. 142 in CFX-Post)

Animation Editor: Control buttons A general explanation of the buttons at the top of the Animation Editor is given below.

Shows current keyframe number

Go back one frame

Shows current frame position. It can be dragged to a new position..

Shows current frame number

Go to rst Keyframe Go back one Play in Keyframe reverse Stop Play Go forward one frame.

Go to last Keyframe Go forward one Keyframe

CFX-5.5.1

Animation

Page 145

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Animation Editor: Options panel

Choose between Timestep Interpolation TimeValue Interpolation and Sequential Interpolation. Select either a JPEG or PPM image format for creation of the MPEG. Toggles whether each frame that makes up the MPEG is kept or deleted. Select how many frames per second will appear in the MPEG. This toggle, when enabled, will take a screen capture of the viewer for each animation keyframe. This option should be enabled if you wish to view face culling in an animation. Toggles between a white/black background. The Scale Factor is the percentage size of the images that make up the JPEG relative to the current viewer size.
Animation Editor: Options panel (p. 146 in CFXPost) Animation Editor (p. 142 in CFX-Post) CCL Objects (p. 230 in CFX-Post) ANIMATION (p. 278 in CFX-Post)

 More Help:

The Animation Options panel is invoked by clicking on the Options... button at the bottom of the Animation Editor Form. The Timestep setting is effective only for transient simulations and controls the way in which frame speed is calculated. Sequential Interpolation divides all timesteps evenly over the total number of frames. Timestep interpolation interpolates relative to the transient timestep number. TimeValue interpolation interpolates to the actual time value of the transient timevalues. Timeout value is an advanced feature that allows you to set the delay between when an action command (such as Play, move forward one frame etc) is issued and when the command is executed. For example, if the delay is large enough you can cancel
Page 146

Animation

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

a Stop command by issuing a Play command immediately afterwards. There will be no change to the executed command in this case. This feature is most effective when incrementing forwards or backwards as it allows you to move ahead or back many frames before actually loading the set frame. The format of the images that make up the MPEG can be chosen. The choices are .jpg files and .ppm files. The toggle Keep Intermediate Graphics Files allows you to select whether each frame image is kept after creation of the MPEG. When the toggle is off, the image files are deleted. The files are stored in the temporary directory (see Options: General (p. 32) for more details). They will be overwritten next time you animate. If you wish to preserve the files, they should be copied to another directory. The Frame Rate is the rate (in frames per second) at which the MPEG will be generated. The MPEG viewer will also dictate the playback rate. The Scale Factor is the percentage size of each image in the MPEG relative to the current viewer size. Reducing the factor can reduce the file size of the MPEG. You may also wish to use a white background in your MPEG by checking the White MPEG Background toggle. By default all image files are created using an internal (softwarebased) rendering engine. In some situations it is desirable to create an exact copy of the screen image, as rendered by the graphics hardware on the computer. This is possible by enabling the Use Screen Capture toggle. For very complex images, this option can be significantly faster. It is important to note that this is a true screen capture, and on some machines and graphics cards it will be important to make sure that there are no other undesired windows or screen objects overlapping the viewer window at the time that the image file is created. These unwanted windows can, in some cases, become part of the MPEG.

CFX-5.5.1

Animation

Page 147

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Timestep Selector
For a transient results file, the Timestep Selector allows you to load the results for different timesteps. This is important when generating keyframes for animation and allows easy study of time-dependent property changes. When the Timestep Selector is opened it will display all the available timesteps that can be loaded. Select one of these and click Apply to load the results for that timestep. The timestep selector will re-read and re-import the mesh if necessary. This feature allows CFX-Post to support transient rotor/stator problems. A complete demonstration of this capability is given in Flow in an Axial Rotor/Stator Arrangement (p. 363 in CFX-5 Tutorials).

The Time Step list displays the time step number in the transient simulation. The Full-Final timestep is the full results le from the last timestep calculated. The Time Value list shows the real time duration corresponding to the Time Step. The units are always seconds (even if other units were specied in the problem setup). The Type list displays if the results le corresponding to that Time Step is a Partial or a Full results le.

Highlight a Time Step, then click on Apply to load the results for that Time Step.

 More Help:
Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) Load Results File (p. 13 in CFX-Post) DATA READER (p. 270 in CFX-Post)

Page 148

Timestep Selector

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Expressions
Click on the Name or Denition button to toggle the ordering of the lists (either A-Z or Z-A). Click to create a new expression. The New Expression window will appear where you should enter a unique name for your expression. Click to edit the highlighted expression. You can then alter the entry in the Denition box. Click to copy the highlighted expressions denition to a new expression. The New Expression window will appear where you should enter a new name. Delete the highlighted expression. You can evaluate the highlighted expression if it does not contain variables. The results is shown in the Value box. Enter the denition of a new expression or edit the denition of an existing expression. See CFX Expression Language (CEL) (p. 173 in CFX-Post) for details on valid expression syntax.

Click Apply to commit any changes or entries made in the Denition box. Restore the expression denition stored in the database. Use this to undo changes before you have pressed Apply.

 More Help:
Expressions (p. 149 in CFX-Post) Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) CFX Expression Language (CEL) (p. 173 in CFX-Post)

The Expression Editor window is used to create and evaluate expressions in CFX-Post. The expressions you create can be used to define object properties, new variables or in place of any numeric value used in CFX-Post (as long as the correct units are returned by the expression). Selecting Tools>Expressions displays the Expressions Editor window shown below. A list of valid CEL expressions and constants can be found in CEL Functions, Constants and System Variables (p. 174 in CFX-Post).
CFX-5.5.1

Expressions

Page 149

CFX-Post Tools Menu

There are some guidelines regarding expressions that you should be aware of: You cannot create an expression with the same name as an object. You cannot create an expression with the same name as a variable. Within the CFX Expression Language some variables are known by short names to save typing in the full variable name. For example, p refers to Pressure. Although it is possible to create an expression with the same name as an abbreviated variable, it will be ignored. For example, 2p will return the value 2*Pressure in all cases. Expression Editor Example In this example you will create an expression which you can use in the next example to define a new User Variable (you cannot use a User Variable to define an expression). Open the Expression Editor window using Tools>Expressions. Click the icon to create a new expression. When the New Expression window appears enter the name radial and click OK. In the Definition box enter the expression sqrt(X^2+Y^2). This expression gives the distance of a point in the X-Y plane from the Z-axis. Click Apply to create the expression. You will use this expression in the next example, see Variable Editor Example (p. 152). Further Expressions After completing the Variable Editor example you can try modifying this expression. You may want to try sqrt(X^2+Z^2) to define a distance from the Y-axis or sqrt(X^2+Y^2+Z^2) to define a sphere. Try moving the location of the sphere by adding values to the X, Y or Z components; for example sqrt(X^2+Y^2+(Z-0.5[m])^2) moves the sphere a distance of 0.5m in the positive Z direction. Note that you must always provide units inside square brackets for constant values typed into an expression.

Page 150

Expressions

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Variables
The Variables Editor is used to create new User Variables and modify the existing Variables. Editing a Variable
Click to create a new Variable. The New Variable window will appear where you should enter a unique name for your Variable. Click to edit the highlighted Variable. See Editing a Variable (p. 151) for details. Click to copy the highlighted Variable denition to a new Variable. The New Variable window will appear where you should enter a new name. Delete the highlighted Variable. For User Variables select the Expression used to dene the Variable. See Expressions (p. 149 in CFX-Post) for details on creating expressions. Set all variables to Hybrid or Conservative values. Select Hybrid or Conservative values for current variable. See Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values (p. 153 in CFX-Post) for more details. For Fundamental Variables, you can select the units by clicking on the edit icon and choosing from the drop-down list.

Click Apply to commit any changes or entries made in the Denition box. Restore the Variable settings stored in the database. Use this to undo changes before you have pressed Apply.

 More Help:
Variable Editor Example (p. 152 in CFX-Post) Variables (p. 151 in CFX-Post) Expressions (p. 149 in CFX-Post) Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post) USER SCALAR VARIABLE (p. 277 in CFX-Post)

You can edit both Fundamental and User Variables by clicking on the Edit icon. For User Variables you can select the expression used to define the Variable from a list of existing expressions. The expressions available from this list are those which you have created in the Expressions Editor (see Expressions (p. 149) for details on creating expressions).
CFX-5.5.1

Variables

Page 151

CFX-Post Tools Menu

For Fundamental Variables you can change the units. This means, for example, that you could create a Legend in the Static Mixer example which uses alternative Temperature units (such as degrees Celsius). Simply click on the edit icon and select new units.
Note: These settings will override the global units setting (defined in the Edit Menu).

The variable type used will effect all quantitative calculations and plots in CFX-Post. You cannot create a variable with the same name as an expression. For example, if you have an expression named Radius, you must choose a different variable name for that expression. Variable Editor Example In this example you will use the expression created in the previous example (see Expression Editor Example (p. 150)) to create an Isosurface which has fixed radial distance from an axis or point. Open the Variables Editor window using Tools>Variables. Click on the icon to create a new Variable. When the New Variable window appears type the name Radial Distance then click OK. In the Variables Editor, use the drop down menu to select the expression radial which you create earlier. Click Apply to create the new Variable. This variable will now appear in the list of available variables and can be used like any other variable. Notice that the variable Type is listed as User. You can now create an Isosurface using this variable. Select Create>Isosurface, enter a name then click OK on the New Isosurface window. In the Geometry tab panel for the Isosurface select the Variable to be Radial Distance.

Page 152

Variables

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Enter a value of 1 m in the Value box. This is a suitable value for results from Tutorial 1: Flow in a Static Mixer, you may need to alter this value to something sensible depending on the results you are viewing. Click the Colour tab and set the Mode option to Variable. Select a sensible variable (e.g. Temperature or Velocity) to colour your Isosurface with. Set the Range option to Local so that the full colour range is used on your Isosurface. Click Apply to create the object. You should now see a cylindrical shaped Isosurface centred about the Z-axis. All points on the Isosurface are a distance of 1 m (or whatever value you used in the Value box) from the Z-axis. Some other expressions to try are given in Further Expressions (p. 150). Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values The CFX-5 Solver calculates the solution to your CFD problem using Finite Volume elements, which are NOT the same as mesh elements. Each node in the mesh is at the centre of a finite volume element. Full details of how the Finite Volume elements are used in the solution process can be found in Numerical Discretisation (p. 327 in CFX-5 Solver and Solver Manager). The result of this is that the values of some variables on the boundary nodes (i.e. on the edges of the geometry) are not precisely equal to the specified boundary conditions (e.g. the value of velocity on a node on the wall will not be precisely zero). For visualisation purposes, it can be more helpful if the nodes at the boundary do contain the specified boundary conditions. Hence hybrid values should usually be used when displaying a plot of a variable. CFX-Post uses hybrid values (corrected boundary node values) by default for most variables. Hybrid values are obtained by taking the results produced by the CFX-5 Solver and over-writing the results on the boundary nodes with the specified boundary conditions. This will ensure, for example, that the velocity is displayed as zero on no-slip walls.

CFX-5.5.1

Variables

Page 153

CFX-Post Tools Menu

However, for quantitative calculations, the original values - known as conservative values - (which do not contain exactly the specified boundary conditions on the boundary nodes) will give more accurate results and should usually be used. If you wish to use these values in CFX-Post, you can select them from the Variables Editor window as described above. By default, CFX-Post will use conservative values when a Calculate command is issued. The difference between hybrid and conservative values at wall boundaries is demonstrated in the figure below.
Velocity Prole Point Velocity Mesh Nodes Control Volume boundaries

Using velocity as an example, the velocity value calculated at a mesh node is based upon the average in the control volume surrounding that node. For calculation purposes the entire control volume is then assumed to possess that velocity. At a boundary node its surrounding control volume includes an area in the bulk of the fluid (this area is highlighted around the boundary node marked 1). Hence the conservative velocity calculated at the wall is not zero, but an average over the control volume. This works well for calculation purposes since quantities such as mass flow are calculated correctly a velocity of zero would produce zero mass flow through the control volume which is clearly inaccurate. Hybrid values correct the wall node velocity to its true value of zero. These values are used to produce plots so that when you view a plot on a wall the correct value is seen.
Page 154

Variables

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Solid-Fluid Interface Variable Values At a solid-fluid interface duplicate nodes exist. The solid-side node holds variable values averaged over the half on the control volume that lies inside the solid. The fluid-side node holds variable values averaged over the half of the control volume that lies in the fluid. Consider the example of heat transfer from a hot solid to a cool fluid when advection dominates within the fluid. If you create a plot across the solid-fluid interface using conservative values of temperature, then you will see a sharp change at the interface in the temperature values. This is because values are interpolated from the interface into the bulk of the solid domain using the value for the solid-side node at the interface. Values are interpolated from the interface into the bulk of the fluid domain using the value for the fluid-side node at the interface. This results in a temperature discontinuity at the interface. When creating plots using hybrid variable values (the default in CFX-Post), the interface is single valued and takes the solid-side value. You can therefore expect to see the same plot within the solid, but the temperature profile between the interface and the first node in the fluid will be interpolated between the solid-side interface value and the first fluid node value. In this case a discontinuity does not exist since all nodes are single valued. Conservative values should still be used for all quantitative calculations. Boundary Value Only Variables Some variables in the CFX-5 Results File only take meaningful values on the boundaries of the geometry. The four examples of this sort of variable are Yplus, Wall Shear, Heat Transfer Coefficient and Wall Heat Flux - see The CFX-5 Output File (p. 106 in CFX-5 Solver and Solver Manager) for more details about how these variables are defined. You will usually only obtain sensible plots when using these variables if they are used to colour a boundary object. If, for example, you try to colour a Slice Plane through the centre of the geometry with of one of these variables, you will see a large area of colour which is meaningless. Only at the very edges of the geometry will there be useful colouration.
Variables

CFX-5.5.1

Page 155

CFX-Post Tools Menu

For boundary value only variables, only hybrid values exist since they are undefined away from a boundary. Note on Hybrid Values for Other Post-processors If you are using the CFX-5 Export Utility to export your results for use in another post-processor, by default the boundary-node corrected values are used, if you are using the CFX-5 Solver Manager. You can choose to export the original, uncorrected values by toggling Use Surface Data on Boundary Nodes OFF on the CFX-5 Solver Manager Export form. If you are running CFX-5 Export from the command line, then the default is to use the uncorrected values unless you specify the command line option -c. See Running CFX-5 Export from the CFX-5 Solver Manager (p. 141 in CFX-5 Solver and Solver Manager) and Running CFX-5 Export from the Command line (p. 150 in CFX-5 Solver and Solver Manager) for more details.

Page 156

Variables

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Command Editor
Click in the editor window to enter commands. See CFX Command Language (p. 163 in CFX-Post) for details. Action commands should be preceded by the > symbol, see Command Actions (p. 185 in CFX-Post) for details. Power Syntax commands should be proceeded by the ! symbol, see Power Syntax (p. 209 in CFX-Post) for more information.

Clear all text from the window by clicking here Click here to process a command

 More Help:
Command Actions (p. 185 in CFX-Post) CFX Command Language (p. 163 in CFX-Post) Power Syntax (p. 209 in CFX-Post) CCL Objects (p. 230 in CFX-Post) Tools Menu (p. 113 in CFX-Post)

The Command Editor can be used to change or create any of the graphic objects using the CFX Command Language. In addition, Power Syntax (see Power Syntax (p. 209 in CFX-Post)) and any valid CCL command (see CFX Command Language (p. 163 in CFX-Post)) can be entered and processed in the Command Editor window. The Command Editor can be brought up by selecting it directly from the Tools menu or by right-clicking on an object in the Object Selector window and selecting Edit in Command Editor. When you open the Command Editor by the right-click method, the CCL definition of that object is automatically displayed and can be edited to alter the object properties. Please see CCL Objects (p. 230 in CFX-Post) for more details.

CFX-5.5.1

Command Editor

Page 157

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Macro Calculator
Select a Macro Function from: Compressor Performance (p. 159) Cp Polar (p. 161)

The options which must be set vary for each function. Follow the above links for information on setting the options for each function. Click to open the Report Viewer. This displays results and charts of the calculations performed.

 More Help:
Click to perform the calculations dened in the macro.
Compressor Performance (p. 159 in CFX-Post) Cp Polar (p. 161 in CFX-Post)

The Macro Calculator is a demonstration feature for this release of CFX-Post. It provides a sample of the some of the results that can be achieved by using the quantitative post-processing ability of CFX-Post embedded into Power Syntax sub-routines (see Power Syntax (p. 209 in CFX-Post) for details on Power Syntax). The macros are provided as CFX-Post Session files containing a subroutine. The options available from the Macro Calculator simply define the arguments with which the subroutine is called. You can view the macro definitions in a text editor, they are located in <CFXROOT>/cfxpost/<release>/ etc/ and have a .cse file extension. For the current release of CFX-Post, two pre-defined Macro Functions have been provided, the Compressor Performance and the Cp Polar macro (we expect additional macros to be provided in future releases). Details about these macros are provided on the following pages. You can execute a macro by clicking the Calculate button. Any Objects, User Variables and Expression defined in the macro will be created. A report is also generated by the Macro Function using Power Syntax and can be viewed by clicking on View Report. The Report Viewer window will display the results; this window must be closed by clicking OK before you can continue using CFX-Post.
Page 158

Macro Calculator

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Compressor Performance The Compressor Performance macro performs a series of calculations using the data set in the Macro Calculator. The following information must be specified: Inlet Region: the locator used to calculate inlet quantities. Outlet Region: the locator used to calculate outlet quantities. Blade Region: the locator used to calculate Torque (one blade) about the Machine Axis. Machine Axis: the axis or rotation of the compressor. Rot. Speed: the rotational speed of the compressor. Tip Radius: the distance of the tip from the axis of rotation. This is used to calculate the tip velocity. Num. Blades: some quantities calculated for a single blade are multiplied by the number of blades to produce total (all blade) values. Fluid Gamma: the ratio of Specific Heat Capacity at Constant Pressure to Specific Heat Capacity at Constant Volume (Cp / Cv). The following Average Quantities are calculated at the inlet and the outlet (the definitions show the inlet as the location used). The ratio of Outlet / Inlet is also provided in the report.
Average Quantity Temperature Total Temperature Pressure Total Pressure Enthalpy Total Enthalpy Denition massFlowAve(Temperature)@inlet massFlowAve(Total Temperature in Stn Frame)@inlet massFlowAve(Pressure)@inlet massFlowAve(Total Pressure in Stn Fame)@inlet massFlowAve(Static Enthalpy)@inlet massFlowAve(Total Enthalpy in Stn Frame)@inlet

CFX-5.5.1

Macro Calculator

Page 159

CFX-Post Tools Menu

The following specific values are calculated and written to the report.
Value Torque (one blade) Torque (all blades) Power (all blades) Dimensionless mass ow (theta) Denition torque_<Machine Axis>()@BladeRegion Torque (one blade) * Num.Blades Torque (all blades) * Rot.Speed massFlow()@inlet * Num.Blades * sqrt(R * tTotalIn / gamma) / (pTotalIn * pi * rTip^2) where tTotalIn is the Total Temperature at the inlet, pTotalIn is the Total Pressure at the inlet and rTip is the Tip Radius. vTip/sqrt(gamma*R*tTotalIn) where tTotalIn is the Total Temperature at the inlet. theta/mu 2/((gamma-1)*mu^2)*((pTotalOut/ pTotalIn)^((gamma-1)/gamma)-1) where pTotalOut and pTotalIn are the Total Pressure at outlet and inlet dened as above. (pTotalIn-pTotalOut)/(pTotalIn) (pTotalIn-pTotalOut)/(pTotalOut) (pTotalIn-pTotalOut)/(pTotalIn-pIn) (pTotalIn-pTotalOut)/(pTotalOut-pOut) (HOut-HSOut)/vTip^2 where HOut is the Static Enthalpy at outlet, HSOut is the Isentropic enthalpy at the outlet and vTip is the tip velocity. (HTOut-HTSOut)/vTip^2 where HTOut is the Total Enthalpy at the outlet and HTSOut is the Isentropic total enthalpy and the outlet. (1-(pTotalOut/pTotalIn)^((gamma-1)/ gamma))/(1-tTotalOut/tTotalIn)

Dimensionless impeller tip speed (mu) Flow Coefcient (phi) Head Coefcient (psis)

Total pressure loss #1 Total pressure loss #2 Total pressure loss #3 Total pressure loss #4 Static Enthalpy Loss (zeta)

Total Enthalpy Loss (delta Q) Total-to-total isen. efciency

Page 160

Macro Calculator

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Value Total-to-static isen. efciency Total-to-total poly. efciency Total-to-static ploy. efciency

Denition (1-(pOut/pTotalIn)^((gamma-1)/gamma))/ (1-tTotalOut/tTotalIn) ((gamma-1)/gamma)*log10(pTotalOut/ pTotalIn)/log10(tTotalOut/tTotalIn) ((gamma-1)/gamma)*log10(pOut/pTotalIn)/ log10(tTotalOut/tTotalIn)

Cp Polar The Cp Polar macro produces a Polar Plot of the pressure coefficient (Cp) along a Polyline. The macro creates the Polyline using the Boundary Intersection method (see Boundary Intersection Method (p. 60 in CFX-Post)). The boundary and intersecting Slice Plane are defined in the Macro Calculator and passed to the subroutine as arguments. The boundaries selected as the Boundary List in the Macro Calculator make up one surface for the intersection. The second surface is a Slice Plane created using the X, Y or Z normal axis to the plane (Slice Normal) and a point on that axis (Slice Position). The User Variable called cp is created by the macro from an expression also called cp. The cp expression is defined in the macro as: cp = (Pressure - $pref [Pa])/dynHead where $pref is the Ref. Pressure set in the Macro Calculator and dynHead a reference dynamic head (evaluated at the inlet) defined as: dynHead = 0.5 * areaAve(Density)@inlet * areaAve(Velocity)@inlet^2 The Inlet Region selected in the Macro Calculator is used as the inlet location in the calculation of dynHead. Next, a Chart Line of the User Variable cp versus the axis selected as the Plot X Axis is created and then plotted in a Chart. The report which is generated contains the Chart and the settings from the Macro Calculator.

CFX-5.5.1

Macro Calculator

Page 161

CFX-Post Tools Menu

Arrange
Arrange is a command that will organise windows conveniently. The viewer will move to the left and all other panels will move to the right. The width of the panels depends on the size of text chosen in the Options panel of the Edit menu (please see Options p. 27 for more details). The viewer width will fill the rest of the available width.

Page 162

Arrange

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

CFX Command Language

Overview of the CFX Command Language (CCL) p. 164 CCL Syntax (p. 165) Object Creation and Deletion (p. 172) CFX Expression Language (CEL) (p. 173)

CFX-5.5.1

Page 163

CFX-Post Advanced

Overview of the CFX Command Language (CCL)

The CFX Command Language (CCL) is the internal communication and command language of CFX-Post. It is a simple language that can be used to create objects or perform actions in the Post-processor. All CCL statements can be classified into one of three categories: 1. Object and parameter definitions. 2. Actions. 3. Power Syntax. Object and parameter definitions are discussed in Object Creation and Deletion (p. 172 in CFX-Post). A list of all objects and parameters that can be used in CFX-Post can be found in CCL Details (p. 229 in CFX-Post). CCL actions are commands which perform a specific task (e.g. reading a Session file). These commands are discussed in Command Actions (p. 185 in CFX-Post). CCL supports programming through Power Syntax. This utilises the Perl programming language to allow loops, logic and custom macros (subroutines). Power Syntax allows Perl commands to be embedded into CCL to achieve powerful quantitative Post-processing. Details can be found in Power Syntax (p. 209 in CFX-Post). State and Session files contain object definitions using CCL. In addition Session files can contain CCL action commands. The CCL written to these files can be viewed and modified in a text editor. You can also use a text editor to create your own Session and State files to read into CFX-Post using CCL. Advanced users can interact with CFX-Post directly through CCL by entering it in the Command Editor window (see Command Editor (p. 157 in CFX-Post)) or by running CFX-Post in Line Interface mode (see Line Interface Mode (p. 221 in CFX-Post) for details). Details of the CCL syntax are discussed on the following pages.

Page 164

Overview of the CFX Command Language (CCL)

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

CCL Syntax
Basic Terminology The following is an example of a CCL object to define an isosurface.
ISOSURFACE: Iso1 Variable = Pressure Value = 15000 [Pa] Colour = 1,0,0 Transparency = 0.5 END

ISOSURFACE is an object type Iso1 is an object name Variable = Pressure is a parameter Variable is a parameter name Pressure is a parameter value If the object type ISOSURFACE does not need a name it is called a singleton object. Only one object of a given singleton type can exist. The Data Hierarchy Data is entered via parameters, these are grouped into objects which are stored in a tree structure.
OBJECT1: object name name1 = value name2 = value END

Objects and parameters may be placed in any order, provided that the information is set prior to being used further down the file. If data is set in one place and modified in another the latter definition overrides the first. In CFX-Post, all object definitions are only one object level deep (i.e. Objects contain parameters, but not other objects).

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Syntax

Page 165

CFX-Post Advanced

Simple Syntax Details

The following applies to any line that is not a Power Syntax or Action line, i.e. does not start with a ! or >. Case Sensitivity Everything in the file is sensitive to case. Case sensitivity is not ideal for users typing in many long parameter names, but it is essential for bringing the CFX Expression Language (CEL) into CCL. This is because some names used to define CCL objects (such as Fluids, Materials and Additional Variables) are used to construct corresponding CEL names. Case sensitive CEL names have been in use since CFX-5.2 (e.g. t = time and T = temperature). For simplicity and consistency, we recommend the following convention is used in the standard code and its documentation: singletons and object types use upper case only parameter names, and pre-defined object names, are mixed case. We try to follow the following conventions: (1) Major words start with an upper case letter, while minor words such as prepositions and conjunctions are left in lower case, e.g Mass Flow in (2) case is preserved for familiar names, e.g. for variables k or r, or for abbreviation RNG. user object names conventions are left to the user to choose. CCL Names Definition Names of singletons, types of object, names of objects, and names of parameters all follow the same rules: In simple syntax, a CCL name must be at least one character. This first character must be alphabetic; there may be any number of subsequent characters and these can be alphabetic, numeric, space or tab. The effect of spaces in CCL names is: Spaces appearing before or after a name are not considered to be part of the name.
Page 166

CCL Syntax

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Single spaces appearing inside a name are significant. Multiple spaces and tabs appearing inside a name are treated as a single space. Indentation Nothing in the file is sensitive to indentation. The indentation will be used, however, when displaying contents of the file for easier reading. End of line comment character The # character is used for this. Any text to the right of this character will be treated as comments. Any characters may be used within comments. Continuation character If a line ends with the character \ the following line will be linked to the existing line. There is no restriction on the number of continuation lines. Named Objects A named object consists of an object type at the start of a line, followed by a : followed by an object name. Subsequent lines may define parameters and child objects associated with this object. The object definition is terminated by the string END on a line by itself. Object names must be unique within the given scope, and the name must not contain an underscore. Singleton Objects A singleton object consists of an object type at the start of a line, followed by a :. Subsequent lines may define parameters and child objects associated with this object. The object definition is terminated by the string END on a line by itself. The difference between a singleton object and a named object is that (after the data has been processed), a singleton can appear just once as the child of a parent object, whereas there may be several instances of a named object of the same type defined with different names.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Syntax

Page 167

CFX-Post Advanced

Parameters A parameter consists of a parameter name at the start of a line followed by an = character followed by a parameter value. A Parameter may belong to many different object types. For example U Velocity = 1.0 [m/s] may belong to an initial value object and U Velocity = 2.0 [m/s] may belong to a boundary condition object. Both refer to the same definition of U velocity in the rules file. Lists Lists are used within the context of parameter values and are comma separated. Parameter values All parameter values are initially handled as data of type String, and should first of all conform to the following definition of allowed String values: String Any characters can be used in a parameter value. String values or other parameter type values are normally unquoted. If any quotes are present, they are considered part of the value. Leading and trailing spaces are ignored. Internal spaces in parameter values are preserved as given, although a given application is free to subsequently assume a space condensation rule when using the data. The characters '$' and '#' have a special meaning. A string beginning with '$' is evaluated as a Power Syntax variable, even if it occurs within a simple syntax statement. This is useful for performing more complex Power Syntax variable manipulation, and then using the result as part of a parameter or object definition. The appearance of '#' anywhere in the CCL file denotes the start of a comment. The characters such as [ ] { } are special only if used in conjunction with $. Following a $, such characters will terminate the preceding Perl variable name.
Page 168

CCL Syntax

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Other characters that might be special elsewhere in power syntax are escaped automatically when they appear in parameter values. For example, @ % and & are escaped automatically. Parameter values can contain commas, but if the string is processed as a List or part of a List then the commas may be interpreted as separators (see below under List data types). Some examples of valid parameter values using special characters in power syntax are:
Estimated cost = \$500 Title = Run\#1 Sys Command = "echo Starting up Stress solver ; fred.exe &" Pressure = $myArray[4] Option = $myHash{"foo"} Fuel = C${numberCatoms}H${numberHatoms}

Parameter values for data types other than String, will additionally conform to one of the following definitions. String List A list of string items separated by commas. Items in a String List should NOT contain a comma unless contained between parentheses. One exception can be made if the String List to be is interpreted as a Real List (see below). Otherwise each item in the String List follows the same rules as String data. Example: Integer Sequence of digits containing no spaces or commas. If a real is specified when an integer is needed the real is rounded to the nearest integer. Integer List List of integers, comma separated.
names

= one, two, three, four

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Syntax

Page 169

CFX-Post Advanced

Real A single precision real number which may be specified in integer, floating point or scientific format, followed optionally by a dimension. Units use the same syntax as CEL. Expressions are allowed to include commas inside function call argument lists. Example usage:
a a a A real a a = 12.24 = 1.224E01 = 12.24 [m s^-1] may also be specified as an expression such as = myvel^2 + b = max(b,2.0)

Real List List of reals, comma separated. Note that all items in the list must have the same dimensions. Those items which are expressions, are allowed to include commas inside function call argument lists, and the enclosed commas will be ignored when the list is parsed into individual items. Example usage:
a = 1.0 [m/s], 2.0 [m/s], 3.0 [m/s], 2.0*myvel, 4.0 [cm/s]

The list syntax 5*2.0 used in CFX-Build to represent 5 entries of the value 2.0 is not supported within CCL and hence within CFX-Post. In CFX-Build the data is expanded prior to being written to the CCL file. Logical Several forms are acceptable: YES or TRUE or 1 or ON are all equivalent; NO or FALSE or 0 or OFF are all equivalent; initial letter variants Y, T, N, F are accepted (O is not accepted (for On/Off); all case variants are accepted. The preferred form, recommended for GUI output files and for user documentation is, Yes/No. Logical strings are also case insensitive (YeS, nO) Logical List List of Logicals, comma separated.

Page 170

CCL Syntax

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Escape character The \ character to be used as an escape character, for example to allow $ or # to be used in strings.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Syntax

Page 171

CFX-Post Advanced

Object Creation and Deletion

You can create objects in CFX-Post by entering the CCL definition of the object into the Command Editor window, or by reading the object definition from a Session or State file. The object will be created and any associated graphics shown in the viewer. For a list of valid CCL objects see CCL Details (p. 229 in CFX-Post). You can modify an existing object by entering the object definition with the modified parameter settings into the Command Editor window. Only those parameters which are to be changed need to be entered. All other parameters will remain unchanged. There may be a significant degree of interaction between objects in CFX-Post. For example, a vector plot may depend on the location of an underlying plane, or an isosurface may depend on the definition of a CEL expression. If changes to one object affect other objects, the other objects will be updated automatically. To delete an object, type >delete <ObjectName>. If you delete an object that is used by other objects, warnings will result, but the object will still be deleted.

Page 172

Object Creation and Deletion

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

The CFX Expression Language (CEL) is integrated into CFX-Post. You can use an expression defined with CEL in place of any number in CFX-Post. Within the post-processor you can: Create new expressions. Set any numeric parameter in a CFX-Post object based on an expression (and the object will update if the expression result changes). Create user-defined variables from expressions. Directly use the post-processor quantitative functions in an expression. Specify units as part of an expression. You cannot (yet): Automatically read CEL expressions from pre-processing set-up in the results file. All expressions in the post-processor are defined in the EXPRESSIONS singleton object. Each expression is a simple name = expression statement within that object. New expressions are added by defining new parameters within the expressions object (the EXPRESSIONS object is special, in that it does not have a predefined list of valid parameters). Important: Since Power Syntax uses Perl mathematical operators, you should exercise caution when combining CEL with Power Syntax expressions. For example, in CEL, 2 2 is represented as 2^2, but in Perl, would be written 2**2. If you are unsure about the validity of an operator in Perl, please consult a Perl reference guide.

CFX-5.5.1

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

Page 173

CFX-Post Advanced

CEL Functions, Constants and System Variables

Quantitative Functions in CEL The quantitative functions available from the Function Calculator in the CFX-Post GUI are integrated into CEL and can be used in any expression. The general syntax used for these functions in CEL is:
[<Fluid>.]<function>[_<Axis>[_<Coord Frame>]]([<Expression>])@<Location>

where terms in [ ] can be optional depending on the function used and terms in < > should be replaced with the required entry. Some examples are given below.
area()@inlet area_x()@inlet areaAve(Pressure - 10000 [Pa])@outlet Water at RTP.force_z()@Default

[<Fluid>.] is always an optional argument which will default to all fluids in the domain if not specified. For multiphase results it can be set to any single fluid in the domain by entering the fluid name followed by a period before the function definition. See the table below for a list of functions that accept this option. <function> specifies the quantitative function to evaluate. See the table below for a list of functions. [_<Axis>_[<Coord Frame>]] can be an optional or a required argument depending on the function evaluated. [_<Axis>_[<Coord Frame>]] can be replaced with _x, _y or _z (lower case only) to specify the default X, Y and Z axis and should follow the function name. You can use an axis from a different coordinate frame by following the axis specification with the name of the Coordinate Frame, e.g. _x_CoordFrame1. ([<Expression>]) is a required argument for some functions and should be left blank as in the above area example (i.e. ())for other function (see the table below for a list). Any valid expression or variable can be used. You can also use a variable as part of an expression as shown in the above areaAve example. @<Location> is required for all quantitative functions.

Page 174

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Consistent units must be maintained when adding, subtracting or comparing values. The following table contains the quantitative function available for use with CEL. The operation performed by the function and the arguments accepted are also shown. A detailed description of the calculation performed by each function is not provided here, see Function Selection (p. 128) for this information.
Function Name area (p. 176) Operation Area projected to axis (no axis specication returns total area) Area-weighted average Area-weighted integral Arithmetic average Number of calculation points Force on a surface in the specied direction Length normalised force on a curve in the specied direction Length of a curve Length-weighted average Length-weighted integration Total mass ow Mass-weighted average Mass-weighted integral Maximum Value Required Arguments @<Location> Optional Arguments _<Axis>

areaAve (p. 176) areaInt (p. 177) ave (p. 177) count (p. 177) force (p. 177) forceNorm (p. 178)

<Expression> @<Location> <Expression> <Location> <Expression> @<Location> @<Location> _<Axis> @<Location> _<Axis> @<Location> @<Location> <Expression> @<Location> <Expression> @<Location> @<Location> <Expression> @<Location> <Expression> @<Location> <Expression> @<Location>

_<Axis> _<Axis>

<Fluid>. <Fluid>.

length (p. 178) lengthAve (p. 178) lengthInt (p. 179) massFlow (p. 179) massFlowAve (p. 179) massFlowInt (p. 179) maxVal (p. 179)

<Fluid>. <Fluid>. <Fluid>.

CFX-5.5.1

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

Page 175

CFX-Post Advanced

Function Name minVal (p. 179) probe (p. 180) sum (p. 180) torque (p. 180) volume (p. 180) volumeAve (p. 180) volumeInt (p. 180)

Operation Minimum Value Value at a point Sum over the calculation points Torque on a surface about the specied axis Volume of a 3-D location Volume-weighted average Volume-weighted integral

Required Arguments <Expression> @<Location> <Expression> @<Location> <Expression> @<Location> _<Axis> @<Location> @<Location> <Expression> @<Location> <Expression> @<Location>

Optional Arguments

<Fluid>.

area
area[_<Axis>]()@<Location>

An error is raised if the location specified is not a 2-D Object. If an axis is not specified the total area of the location is calculated. See area (p. 129) for a function description. Example: area()@Isosurface1 calculates the total area of the location Isosurface1. Example: area_y()@Isosurface1 calculates the projected area of Isosurface1 onto a plane normal to the Y-axis. areaAve
areaAve[_<Axis>](<Expression>)@<Location>

An error is raised if the location specified is not a 2-D Object. See areaAve (p. 130) for a function description. Example: (Pressure - 1[bar])/ (0.5*Density*(areaAve(Velocity)@inlet)^2) calculates the Pressure coefficient Cp. You can create an expression using this, and then create a User Variable using the expression. The User Variable can then be plotted on objects like any other variable.
Page 176

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

areaInt
areaInt[_<Axis>](<Expression>)@<Location>

An error is raised if the location specified is not a 2-D Object. Axis is optional and if not specified the integration is performed over the total face area. If axis is specified, then the integration is performed over the projected face area. See areaInt (p. 130) for a function description.

Example: areaInt_y_Frame2(Pressure)@boundary1 calculates the pressure force acting in the y-direction of the coordinate frame Frame2 on the locator boundary1. This differs from a calculation using the force function which calculates the total force on a wall boundary (i.e. viscous forces on the boundary are included). ave
ave(<Expression>)@<Location>

The ave function can be used on Point, 1-D, 2-D and 3-D locations. See ave (p. 131) for a function description. Example: ave(Yplus)@Default calculates the mean Yplus values from each node on the default walls. count
count()@<Location>

The count function is valid for point, 1-D, 2-D and 3-D locations. See count (p. 132) for a function description. Example: count()@Polyline1 returns the number of points on the specified Polyline locator. force
[<Fluid>.]force_<Axis>()@<Location>

CFX-5.5.1

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

Page 177

CFX-Post Advanced

Force calculations on boundaries require additional momentum flow data. This can be include in the Results file by adding the Expert Control Parameter output eq flows and setting its value to T. See force (p. 132) for a function description. Example: Water at RTP.force_x()@wall1 returns the total force in the x-direction acting on wall1 due to the fluid Water at RTP. forceNorm
[<Fluid>.]forceNorm_<Axis>()@<Location>

Returns the per unit width force on the specified line in the direction of the specified axis. An error will be raised if the location specified is not one-dimensional. See forceNorm (p. 133) for a function description. Example: forceNorm_y()@Polyline1 calculates the per unit width force in the y-direction on the selected Polyline. length
length()@<Location>

A 1-D location should be specified (specifying a 2-D location will not produce an error, the sum of the edge lengths from the elements in the locator will be returned). Note that when using this function in Power Syntax the leading character should be capitalised to avoid confusion with the Perl internal command length. See length (p. 133 in CFXPost) for a function description. Example: length()@Polyline1 returns the length of the Polyline. lengthAve
lengthAve(<Expression>)@<Location>

A 1-D or 2-D location must be specified. See lengthAve (p. 134) for a function description. Example: lengthAve(T)@Polyline1 calculates the average Temperature on Polyline1 weighted by the distance between each point (T is the System Variable for Temperature).

Page 178

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

lengthInt
lengthInt(<Expression>)@<Location>

A 1-D location must be specified. See lengthInt (p. 134) for a function description. massFlow
[<Fluid>.]massFlow()@<Location>

Computes the mass flow through the specified 2-D location. See massFlow (p. 134) for a function description. Example: Air at STP.massFlow()@DegassingOutlet calculates the mass flow of Air at STP through the selected location. massFlowAve
[<Fluid>.]massFlowAve(<Expression>)@<Location>

An error is raised if the location specified is not 2-D. See massFlowAve (p. 134) for a function description. Example: massFlowAve(Density)@Plane1 calculates the average Density on Plane1 weighted by the mass flow at each point on the location. massFlowInt
[<Fluid>.]massFlowInt(<Expression>)@<Location>

An error is raised if the location specified is not 2-D. See massFlowInt (p. 135) for a function description. maxVal
maxVal(<Expression>)@<Location>

Point, and one, two and three-dimensional locators can be specified. See maxVal (p. 135) for a function description. minVal
minVal(<Expression>)@<Location>

Point, and one, two and three-dimensional locators can be specified. See minVal (p. 135) for a function description.
CFX-5.5.1

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

Page 179

CFX-Post Advanced

probe
probe(<Expression>)@<Location>

Valid only for Point locators, this will return the value of a variable at a given location. See probe (p. 135) for a function description. sum
sum(<Expression>)@<Location>

One, two and three-dimensional locators can be specified. See sum (p. 136) for a function description. torque
[<Fluid>.]torque_<Axis>()@<Location>

An error is raised if the location specified is not 2-D.See torque (p. 136) for a function description. volume
volume()@<Location>

An error is raised if the location specified is not a 3-D Object. See volume (p. 136) for a function description. volumeAve
volumeAve(<Expression>)@<Location>

An error is raised if the location specified is not a 3-D Object. Any variable or valid expression (see CEL Functions, Constants and System Variables (p. 173 in CFX-Post)) can be used as the <Expression> argument. See volumeAve (p. 137) for a function description. volumeInt
volumeInt(<Expression>)@<Location>

A 3-D Object must be selected as the location. See volumeInt (p. 137) for a function description. Example: volumeInt(Density)@StaticMixer calculates the total fluid mass in the domain StaticMixer.

Page 180

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

CEL Standard Functions The following is a list of standard functions that are available in CFX-Post. In the table below:
Note: [ ] denotes a dimensionless quantity. [a] denotes any dimensions of first operand. Result [] [] [] [radian] [radian] [radian] [radian] [] [] [] [a] [a^0.5] [] [a] [a] Function sin cos tan asin acos atan atan2 exp loge log10 abs sqrt step min max Operands ([radian]) ([radian]) ([radian]) ([ ]) ([ ]) ([ ]) ([ ],[ ])) ([ ]) ([ ]) ([ ]) ([a]) ([a]) ([ ]) ([a],[a]) ([a],[a])

CEL Constants The following predefined constants can be used within CEL expressions.
Constant e g pi
CFX-5.5.1

Units <none> m^2 s^-2 <none>

Description Constant : 2.7182817 Accn. due to gravity : 9.806 Constant : 3.1415927 CFX Expression Language (CEL)
Page 181

CFX-Post Advanced

Constant R

Units m^2 s^-2 K^-1

Description Universal Gas Constant : 8314.5

CEL System Variables The following System Variables are available for use with CEL when defining expressions:
Name x y z r theta t u v w p vf ke ed eddy viscosity T sstrnr density viscosity Cp cond enthalpy
Page 182

Meaning Direction 1 in Reference Coordinate Frame Direction 2 in Reference Coordinate Frame Direction 3 in Reference Coordinate Frame Radial spatial location, r = Angle, arctan(y/x) Time Velocity in the x coordinate direction Velocity in the y coordinate direction Velocity in the z coordinate direction (absolute) Pressure Volume Fraction Turbulent kinetic energy Turbulent eddy dissipation Eddy Viscosity Temperature Shear strain rate Density Dynamic Viscosity Specic Heat Capacity at Constant Pressure Thermal Conductivity Specic Enthalpy
CFX-5.5.1

x +y

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

CFX-Post Advanced

Name beta speedofsound subdomain mean diameter deneff

Meaning Thermal Expansivity Local speed of sound in uid Subdomain variable (1.0 in Subdomain, 0.0 elsewhere) Mean Diameter Effective Density Additional Variable name

AV name

The r, theta t and subdomain values in the above table can only be used if the variables associated with them are output from the solver. r and theta are not calculated by CFX-Post from x, y, z but expressions to do so can be defined. subdomain is not usually defined in CFX-Post. Where appropriate, fluid or component names may be prefixed to these variables i.e. Water at STP.v.

CFX-5.5.1

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

Page 183

CFX-Post Advanced

Page 184

CFX Expression Language (CEL)

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

Command Actions
Overview of Command Actions p. 186 File Operations from the Command Editor p. 188 Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor p. 201

CFX-5.5.1

Page 185

CFX-Post Advanced

Overview of Command Actions

The Command Editor in CFX-Post can be used to edit or create graphics objects, perform some typical user actions (e.g. reading or creating session and State files) and entering Power Syntax. This section describes the typical user actions you can perform from the Command Editor. For an introduction to the Command Editor see Command Editor (p. 157 in CFX-Post). For details on editing and creating graphics objects using the CFX Command Language in the Command Editor see CFX Command Language (p. 163 in CFX-Post). Power Syntax commands are preceded by the ! symbol, for details on using Power Syntax in the Command Editor see Power Syntax (p. 209 in CFX-Post). Action statements are used to force CFX-Post to undertake a specific task, usually related to the input and output of data from the system. All actions entered into the Command Editor must be proceeded with the > symbol. Actions in Session files are also be preceded by the > character. When running CFX-Post in Line Interface mode, the CFX> command prompt is shown in a DOS window or UNIX shell. All the actions described in this section along with some additional commands can be entered at the command prompt. You do not have to precede commands with the > symbol when running in Line Interface mode. Details on using Line Interface mode can be found in Line Interface Mode (p. 221 in CFX-Post). Many actions require additional information to perform their task (e.g. the name of a file to load, the type of hardcopy file to create). By default, these actions get the necessary information from a specific associated CCL singleton object. For convenience, some actions accept a few arguments that be used to optionally over-ride the commonly changed object settings. If multiple arguments for an action are specified, they must be separated by a comma (,).

Page 186

Overview of Command Actions

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

For example, all the settings for >print are read from the HARDCOPY: object. However, if the user desires, they can specify the name of the hardcopy file as an argument to >print. The following CCL example demonstrates this behaviour of actions.
# Define settings for printing HARDCOPY: Hardcopy Format= jpg Hardcopy Filename = default.jpg Image Scale = 70 White Background = Off END #Creates an output file based on the settings in HARDCOPY >print #Creates an identical output file with a different filename. >print another_file.jpg

CFX-5.5.1

Overview of Command Actions

Page 187

CFX-Post Advanced

File Operations from the Command Editor Loading a Results File

>load [filename=<filename>][timestep=<timestep>]

Loading a results file is performed using the >load command. The parameters settings for loading the file are read from the DATA READER object (see DATA READER (p. 270 in CFX-Post)). For simplicity, some parameters may be set via optional parameters as part of the load command. When a Results file is loaded, all Domain, Boundary and Variable objects associated with the results file are created or updated. Variable objects are created, but the associated data is not actually read into the post-processor until the variables are used (load-ondemand). Variables will be pre-loaded if specified in the DATA READER. load Command Examples The following are example >load commands with the expected results.
>load filename=c:/CFX5/tutorials/Buoyancy2DVMI_002.res, timestep=3

This command loads the specified Results file at timestep 3. If a timestep is not specified a value of -1 is assumed (this corresponds to the Final State). If going from a Transient to Steady State Results file you should specify the timestep to be -1 if this is not the current setting. If you do not you will get a Warning message stating that the existing timestep does not exist. The -1 timestep will then be loaded.
>load timestep=4

This command loads timestep 4 in the existing Results file.

Creating Session Files

First, it is necessary to set the name of the file to which your session commands will be saved. This can be done by entering the CCL for the Singleton object SESSION. (for more information please see SESSION (p. 272 in CFX-Post).
Page 188

File Operations from the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

In the command window enter

SESSION: Session Filename = <filename.cse> END

This will set up the session file to prepare for recording of commands. To begin recording commands, enter the following line into the Command Editor:
>session start [mode=<none | overwrite | append>, filename=<filename>] >session stop

Session files can be used to quickly reproduce all the actions performed in a previous CFX-Post session on any Results file. Session files can be generated manually using a text editor, or from within CFX-Post by recording a Session. The commands required to write to these files from the Command Editor are described below. The >session command handles all Write Session features. The following options are available to support the functionality: The start option initiates the saving of a session. The following options are available for starting a session: mode = <none | overwrite | append> If mode is set to none (the default value), an error will be raised if the file already exists. If mode is set to overwrite, the file will be deleted and newly created if it already exists. If mode is set to append, the new session will be appended to the end of the existing file. filename = <filename> This sub-option indicates the filename and path to which the session will be written. If no filename is specified, the SESSION singleton (see SESSION (p. 272 in CFX-Post)) indicates the filename and the mode to use for overwriting/appending. If no SESSION singleton exists, an error is raised indicating that a filename must be specified. The stop option terminates the saving of a session, and closes the session file. No sub-options are accepted with this option.

CFX-5.5.1

File Operations from the Command Editor

Page 189

CFX-Post Advanced

session Command Examples The following are example >session commands, and the expected results. If a SESSION singleton exists (see SESSION (p. 272 in CFXPost)), the values of the parameters listed after the session command will replace the values stored in the SESSION singleton object. For the >session command, the filename parameter value will replace the session filename parameter value in the SESSION singleton, and the mode command parameter value will replace the write session mode parameter value in the SESSION singleton.
> session start, filename = mysession.cse

This action will start a new session in a filename called mysession.cse. If mysession.cse already exists, the overwrite/ append behaviour will be dependent on that set in the SESSION singleton. If no SESSION singleton exists, and the mysession.cse file also exists, the command will fail with an error message (i.e. default mode is none).
> session start, mode = none, filename = mysession.cse

This command will start a new session file in a filename called mysession.cse. If mysession.cse already exists, the command will fail with an error message.
> session start, mode = overwrite, filename = mysession.cse

This command will start a new session. If mysession.cse already exists it will be deleted, and replaced with the new session. If the file does not already exist, it will be created.
> session start, mode = append, filename = mysession.cse

This command will start a new session. If mysession.cse already exists, the new session will be appended to the end of the existing file. If the file does not already exist, it will be created.
> session start

This command will start a new session, using the mode and filename defined in the SESSION singleton. If the SESSION singleton does not exist, an error message will be raised indicating that a filename needs to be specified.
> session start, mode = overwrite
Page 190

File Operations from the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

This command will start a new session with a filename of that specified in the SESSION singleton. If the specified file already exists, it will be deleted and a new file will be created. If the SESSION singleton does not exist, an error message will be raised indicating that a filename needs to be specified.
> session start, mode = append

This command will start a new session with a filename of that specified in the SESSION singleton. If the specified file already exists, the new session will be appended to the end of the existing file. If the SESSION singleton does not exist, an error message will be raised indicating that a filename needs to be specified.
> session start, mode = none

This command will start a new session with a filename of that specified in the SESSION singleton. If the specified file already exists, the command will be terminated with an error message. If the SESSION singleton does not exist, an error message will be raised indicating that a filename needs to be specified.
> session stop

This command will terminate the current session in progress, and close the currently open session file.

Reading Session Files

>readsession [filename=<filename>]

The >readsession command performs session file reading and executing. The following options are available to support the functionality: filename = <filename> This option specifies the filename and path to the file that should be read and executed. If no filename is specified, the SESSION singleton object (see SESSION (p. 272 in CFX-Post)) will indicate the file to use. If no SESSION singleton exists, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.

CFX-5.5.1

File Operations from the Command Editor

Page 191

CFX-Post Advanced

readsession Command Examples The following are example >readsession commands, and the expected results. If a SESSION singleton exists, the values of the parameters listed after the session command will replace the values stored in the SESSION singleton object. For this command, the filename command parameter value will replace the session filename parameter value in the SESSION singleton.
> readsession

This command will read the session file specified in the SESSION singleton, and execute its contents. If the SESSION object does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
> readsession filename = mysession.cse

This command will read and execute the contents of the mysession.cse file.

Saving State Files

>savestate [mode=<none | overwrite>][filename=<filename>]

State files can be used to quickly load a previous state into CFX-Post. State files can be generated manually using a text editor, or from within CFX-Post by saving a State file. The commands required to save to these files from the Command Editor are described below. The >savestate command is used to write the current CFX-Post state to a file. The >savestate action supports the following options: mode = <none | overwrite> If mode is none, the executor will create a new State file, and if the specified file exists, an error will be raised. If mode is overwrite, the executor will create a new State file, and if the file exists, it will be deleted and replaced with the latest state information. filename = <filename> Specifies the path and name of the file that the state is to be written to. If no filename is specified, the STATE singleton object (see STATE (p. 272 in CFX-Post)) will be queried for the filename. If the STATE singleton does not exist, then an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
Page 192

File Operations from the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

savestate Command Examples The following are example >savestate commands, and the expected results. If a STATE singleton exists, the values of the parameters listed after the >savestate command will replace the values stored in the STATE singleton object. For this command, the filename command parameter value will replace the state filename parameter value in the STATE singleton, and the mode command parameter value will replace the savestate mode parameter value in the STATE singleton.
> savestate

This command will write the current state information to the filename specified in the STATE singleton. If the mode in the STATE singleton is none, and the filename exists, an error will be returned. If the mode in the STATE singleton is overwrite, and the filename exists, the existing file will be deleted, and the state information will be written to the file. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename needs to be specified.
> savestate mode = none

This command will write the current state information to the file specified in the STATE singleton. If the file already exists, an error will be raised. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename needs to be specified.
> savestate mode = overwrite

This command will write the current state information to the file specified in the STATE singleton. If the file already exists, it will be deleted, and the current state information will be saved in its place. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename needs to be specified.
> savestate filename = mystate.cst

This command will write the current state information to the mystate.cst file. If the STATE singleton exists, and the savestate mode is set to none, and the file already exists, the command will cause an error. If the savestate mode is set to overwrite, and the file already exists, the file will be deleted, and the current state information will be saved in its place. If the STATE singleton does not exist, then the system will assume a savestate mode of none, and behave as described above.
CFX-5.5.1

File Operations from the Command Editor

Page 193

CFX-Post Advanced

> savestate mode = none, filename = mystate.cst

This command will write the current state information to the mystate.cst file. If the file already exists, the command will cause an error.
> savestate mode = overwrite, filename = mystate.cst

This command will write the current state information to the mystate.cst file. If the file already exists it will be deleted, and the current state information will be saved in its place.

Reading State Files

>readstate [mode=<overwrite | append>][filename=<filename>, load=<true | false>]

The >readstate command loads a CFX-Post state from a specified file. If a DATA READER singleton (see DATA READER (p. 270 in CFXPost)) has been stored in the State file, the load action will be invoked to load the contents of the Results file. If a State file contains BOUNDARY objects, and the State file is appended to the current state (with no new DATA READER object), some boundaries defined may not be valid for the loaded results. BOUNDARY objects that are not valid for the currently loaded Results file will be culled. >readstate supports the following options: mode = <overwrite | append> If mode is set to overwrite, the executor will delete all the objects that currently exist in the system, and load the objects saved in the State file. Overwrite mode is the default mode if none is explicitly specified. If mode is set to append, the executor will add the objects saved in the State file to the objects that already exist in the system. If the mode is set to append and the State file contains objects that already exist in the system, the following logic will be used to determine the final result:

Page 194

File Operations from the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

If the system has an equivalent object, i.e. name and type, then the object already in the system will be modified with the parameters saved in the State file. If the system has an equivalent object in name only, then the object that already exists in the system will be deleted, and replaced with that in the State file. filename = <filename> The path to the State file. load = <true | false> If load is set to true and a DATA READER object is defined in the State file, then the Results file will be loaded when the State file is read. If load is set to false, the Results file will not be loaded, and the DATA READER object that currently is in the object Database (if any) will not be updated. readstate Option Actions The following table describes the options, and what will happen based on the combination of options that are selected.
Mode Selection Overwrite Load Data Selection True What happens to the objects? What happens to the Data Reader It gets deleted and replaced.

All user objects (Planes etc.) get deleted. The loading of the new Results le will change the default objects (boundaries, wireframe etc.) including deletion of object that are no longer relevant to the new results. Default objects that are not explicitly modied by object denitions in the State le will have all user modiable values reset to default values. All user objects get deleted. All default objects that exist in the State le will update the same objects in the current system state if they exist. Default object in the State le that do not exist in the current state will not be created. All user object in the State le will be created.

Overwrite

False

If it exists, it remains unchanged regardless of what is in the State le.

CFX-5.5.1

File Operations from the Command Editor

Page 195

CFX-Post Advanced

Mode Selection Append

Load Data Selection True

What happens to the objects?

What happens to the Data Reader It is modied with new value from the State le.

No objects are initially deleted. The default objects in the State le will replace the existing default objects. User object will: be created if they have a unique name. replace existing objects if they have the same name but different type. update existing objects if they have the same name and type. No objects are initially deleted. Default object in the State le will only overwrite those in the system if they already exist. User objects have the same behaviour as the Append/True option above.

Append

False

If it exists, it remains unchanged regardless of what is in the State le.

readstate Command Examples The following are example >readstate commands, and the expected results. If a STATE singleton exists (see STATE (p. 272 in CFXPost)), the values of the parameters listed after the >readstate command will replace the values stored in the STATE singleton object. For this command, the filename command parameter value will replace the state filename parameter value in the STATE singleton, and the mode command parameter value will replace the readstate mode parameter value in the STATE singleton.
> readstate filename = mystate.cst

The readstate mode parameter in the STATE singleton determines if the current objects in the system are deleted before the objects defined in the mystate.cst file are loaded into the system. If the STATE singleton does not exist, then the system objects are deleted before loading the new state information.
> readstate mode = overwrite, filename = mystate.cst

This command will delete all objects currently in the system, open the mystate.cst file if it exists, and create the objects as stored in the State file.
> readstate mode = append, filename = mystate.cst
Page 196

File Operations from the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

This command will open the mystate.cst file if it exists, and add the objects defined in the file to those already in the system following the rules specified in the previous table.
> readstate

This command will overwrite or append to the objects in the system using the objects defined in the file referenced by the state filename parameter in the STATE singleton. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
> readstate mode = overwrite

This command will overwrite the objects in the system with the objects defined in the file referenced by the state filename parameter in the STATE singleton. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
> readstate mode = append

This command will append to the objects in the system using the objects defined in the file referenced by the state filename parameter in the STATE singleton. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.

Creating Hardcopy
>print [filename=<filename>]

The >print command creates a file of the current viewer contents. Settings for output format, quality, etc. are read from the HARDCOPY singleton object (see HARDCOPY (p. 267 in CFX-Post)). The optional argument <filename> can be used to specify the name of the output file to override that stored in HARDCOPY. HARDCOPY must exist before print is executed.

Importing External File Formats

Two special objects are the Polyline and User Surface objects. These may be used to read line or surface data (with local variables) defined in an external file, and then plot this data in the CFX-Post Viewer. The format of these files is described below. The external file is specified as
CFX-5.5.1

File Operations from the Command Editor

Page 197

CFX-Post Advanced

an Essential Parameter of the Polyline or User Surface CCL object when the From File option is selected. See POLYLINE (p. 240 in CFX-Post) or USER SURFACE (p. 252 in CFX-Post) for details on setting the CCL parameters for these objects. POLYLINE Data Format A set of polylines can be defined in a simple text file with the following format.
## This is a comment! ## List of path variables, if any. # var1Name # var2Name # ... ## List of point locations with path variable values ## if path variables are defined <X> <Y> <Z> <var1Data> <var2Data> ... <X> <Y> <Z> <var1Data> <var2Data> ... ... ## Next line is a keyword to start line definitions ## this section is optional # Lines <Point0> <Point1> <Point1> <Point2> ...

Comments in the file are preceded by ## and can appear anywhere in the file. A single # does NOT indicate a comment, words appearing after a single # are keywords such as Lines. The start of the file should begin with a list of path variables (up to 256 characters, spaces allowed), these are variables that are only defined on the polyline. You should make sure that the names of these variables do not conflict with the names of existing variables. You do not have do define any path variables (e.g. if you just want to define the location of a polyline), in which case your file will begin with the point location values. After the optional path variable list follows the point location list in X Y Z format. You must also include a value for each path variable that you have defined at the start of the file (if any). You can end the file after the list of point locations if you want a single line to be created joining each point in order. Alternatively, you can specify lines by typing # Lines followed by a list of start point - end point values that
Page 198

File Operations from the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

reference the list of point locations. The list of point locations are numbered 0,1,2....n-1 where n is the number of points in the list. When you define lines, the start point and end point numbers are these values. Blank lines are ignored and can appear anywhere in the file.

Example: This example produces two lines, the first from [1 1 1] to [1 2 1] and the second from [2 2 1] to [2 1 1]. Two path variables have values at each point:
# # 1 1 2 2 Time MyVar 1 1 1.2 500 2 1 2.1 200 2 1 3.4 300 1 1 4.65 400

# Lines 0 1 2 3

Example: This example simply produces a single line that passes through each point in the list in order:
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 3

USER SURFACE Data Format The following outlines the valid data format for a user-defined surface.
## Comment line - optional. ## List of path variables # <varName1> # <varName2> # ... ## List of point locations with path variable values ## Each line in the following list will be numbered 0,1,2... <X> <Y> <Z> <Var1Value> <Var2Value> ... <X> <Y> <Z> <Var1Value> <Var2Value> ...
CFX-5.5.1

File Operations from the Command Editor

Page 199

CFX-Post Advanced

... ## Next line is a keyword that starts the definition of faces # Faces ## List of 3 - 6 point numbers to define faces. <Point0> <Point1> <Point2> <Point1> <Point2> <Point3> <Point4> <Point5> <Point6> ...

This is similar to the Polyline data format described above. Comments, the list of path variables and the point location list (with path variable values if defined) uses the same format as the polyline data format. Instead of defining lines, surfaces are defined by typing # Faces followed by lists of 3 (triangle) to 6 (hexagon) points to define each surface. Each surface is automatically closed by connecting the last point to the first point. The list of point locations are numbered 0,1,2....n-1 where n is the number of points in the list. When you define faces, you use these numbers to reference the points in your point location list. The faces specification is NOT optional.

Example: This example defines one quadrilateral face with two path variables at each point of the face:
# Time # MyVar 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1.2 500 2.1 200 3.4 300 4.65 400

# Faces 0 1 2 3

Exporting Data
Data export is controlled using the >export command. The names of variables to export, locations to export, filenames, etc are defined in the EXPORT singleton object (see EXPORT (p. 271 in CFX-Post).

Page 200

File Operations from the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor

When executing a calculation from the Command Editor, the result is displayed in the Calculator Window. The >calculate command is used to perform function calculations in the Command Editor. Typing >calculate alone will perform the calculation using the parameters stored in the CALCULATOR singleton object (see CALCULATOR (p. 291 in CFX-Post) for details of valid CCL parameters). Entering >calculate <function name> will not work if required arguments are needed by the function.

Function Calculation
>calculate [<function name>, <arguments>]

A number of useful quantitative functions have been defined within CFX-Post. These functions are specified in the table below, you can follow the links in the Function Name column to see the syntax used for each function when using them from the Command Editor. A detailed description of the calculation performed by each function is not provided here, see Function Selection (p. 128 in CFX-Post) for this information. When using quantitative functions as part of a CEL expression, a different syntax is required, see Quantitative Functions in CEL (p. 174 in CFX-Post) for details. These functions may be accessed from the Command Editor using the >calculate command, or via function calls within Power Syntax. Reference documentation on the Power Syntax functions is provided in Power Syntax (p. 209 in CFX-Post). When a function is evaluated, a singleton CALCULATOR object (see CALCULATOR (p. 291 in CFX-Post)) is created which shows the parameters and results for the most recent calculation. If the >calculate command is supplied without a <function name> or <arguments>, then the calculation is performed with the settings from the CALCULATOR object (which may be modified like any other object in the Command Editor). An error is raised if the CALCULATOR object does not exist.

CFX-5.5.1

Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor

Page 201

CFX-Post Advanced

When evaluated as part a Power Syntax function, the results of the calculation can be stored in a Power Syntax variable for further processing. See Examples of Power Syntax (p. 212 in CFX-Post) for examples of using calculations within Power Syntax.
Function Name area (p. 203) areaAve (p. 204) areaInt (p. 204) ave (p. 204) count (p. 204) force (p. 204) forceNorm (p. 204) length (p. 205) lengthAve (p. 205) lengthInt (p. 205) massFlow (p. 205) massFlowAve (p. 205) massFlowInt (p. 205) maxVal (p. 205) minVal (p. 205) probe (p. 206) sum (p. 206) torque (p. 206) volume (p. 206) Operation Area projected to axis (no axis specication returns total area) Area-weighted average Area-weighted integral Arithmetic average Number of calculation points Force on a surface in the specied direction Length normalised force on a curve in the specied direction Length of a curve Length-weighted average Length-weighted integration Total mass ow Mass-weighted average Mass-weighted integral Maximum Value Minimum Value Value at a point Sum over the calculation points Torque on a surface about the specied axis Volume of a 3-D location Arguments <required> [<optional>] <Location>, [<Axis>] <Expression>, <Location>, [<Axis>] <Expression>, <Location>, [<Axis>] <Expression>, <Location> <Location> <Location>, <Axis>, [<Fluid>] <Location>, <Axis>, [<Fluid>] <Location> <Expression>, <Location> <Expression>, <Location> <Location>, [<Fluid>] <Expression>, <Location>, [<Fluid>] <Expression>, <Location>, [<Fluid>] <Expression>, <Location> <Expression>, <Location> <Expression>, <Location> <Expression>, <Location> <Location>, <Axis>, [<Fluid>] <Location>

Page 202

Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Function Name volumeAve (p. 206) volumeInt (p. 206)

Operation Volume-weighted average Volume-weighted integral

Arguments <required> [<optional>] <Expression>, <Location> <Expression>, <Location>

Expression Specification Any variable or valid expression (see CEL Functions, Constants and System Variables (p. 174 in CFX-Post)) can be used as the <Expression> argument, e.g. areaAve Pressure, myPlane is allowed. Axis Specification Some functions take an axis specification as an argument. The general format for an axis specification is:
[<Coord Frame Name>_]<X|Y|Z>

The coordinate frame name is optional, if not supplied the Global X, Y, or Z axis is used. If you wish to specify any axis that is not a global one, you must first create a COORD FRAME object with the correct orientation, and then use the name of that coord frame in the axis specification. An underscore symbol must precede the X, Y or Z specification (e.g. MyCoord_Y). Quantitative Function List area
>calculate area, <Location>, [<Axis>]

The specification of an axis is optional, if an axis is not specified the value held in the CALCULATOR (p. 291 in CFX-Post) object will be used. To calculate the total area of the location the axis specification should be left blank (i.e. a comma should be typed after the location specification). See area (p. 129) for a detailed function description. Example: >calculate area, myplane will calculate the area of the locator myplane projected onto a plane normal to the Axis specification in the CALCULATOR object.

CFX-5.5.1

Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor

Page 203

CFX-Post Advanced

Example: >calculate area, myplane, will calculate the area of the locator myplane. Note that adding the comma after myplane removes the Axis specification. areaAve
>calculate areaAve, <Expression>, <Location>, <Axis>

See areaAve (p. 130) for a detailed function description. areaInt

>calculate areaInt, <Expression>, <Location>, [<Axis>]

Axis is optional. If it is not specified the value held in the CALCULATOR (p. 291 in CFX-Post) object will be used. To perform the integration over the total face area the axis specification should be blank (i.e. type a comma after the location name). See areaInt (p. 130) for a detailed function description. ave
>calculate ave, <Expression>, <Location>

See ave (p. 131) for a detailed function description. count

>calculate count, <Location>

See count (p. 132) for a detailed function description. force

>calculate force, <Location>, <Axis>, [<Fluid>]

To include the required momentum flow data in your Results file to calculate forces on boundaries, you should set the the option Output Equation Flows to ON on the Solver Control Form in CFX-Build (please see Output Equation Flows (p. 1291 in CFX-Build: Chapter 10) for more information). See force (p. 132) for a detailed function description. forceNorm
>calculate forceNorm, <Location>, <Axis>, [<Fluid>]

See forceNorm (p. 133) for a detailed function description.

Page 204

Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

length
>calculate length, <Location>

Note that when using this function in Power Syntax the leading character should be capitalised to avoid confusion with the Perl internal command length. See length (p. 133) for a function description. lengthAve
>calculate lengthAve, <Expression>, <Location>

See lengthAve (p. 134) for a detailed function description. lengthInt

>calculate lengthInt, <Expression>, <Location>.

See lengthInt (p. 134) for a detailed function description. massFlow

>calculate massFlow, <Location>, [<Fluid>]

See massFlow (p. 134) for a detailed function description. massFlowAve

>calculate massFlowAve, <Expression>, <Location>, [<Fluid>]

See massFlowAve (p. 134) for a detailed function description. massFlowInt

>calculate massFlowInt, <Expression>, <Location>, [<Fluid>]

See massFlowInt (p. 135) for a detailed function description. maxVal

>calculate maxVal, <Expression>, <Location>

See maxVal (p. 135) for a detailed function description. minVal

>calculate minVal, <Expression>, <Location>

See minVal (p. 135) for a detailed function description.

CFX-5.5.1

Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor

Page 205

CFX-Post Advanced

probe
>calculate probe, <Expression>, <Location>

See probe (p. 135) for a detailed function description. sum

>calculate sum, <Expression>, <Location>

See sum (p. 136) for a detailed function description. torque

>calculate torque, <Location>, <Axis>, [<Fluid>]

To include the required momentum flow data in your Results file to calculate torques, you should set the the option Output Equation Flows to ON on the Solver Control Form in CFX-Build (please see Output Equation Flows (p. 1291 in CFX-Build: Chapter 10) for more information). See torque (p. 136) for a detailed function description. volume
>calculate volume, <Location>

See volume (p. 136) for a detailed function description. volumeAve

>calculate volumeAve, <Expression>, <Location>

See volumeAve (p. 137) for a detailed function description. volumeInt

>calculate volumeInt, <Expression>, <Location>

See volumeInt (p. 137) for a detailed function description.

Page 206

Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Other Commands
Deleting Objects
>delete <objectnamelist>

The >delete command can be used in the Command Editor to delete objects. The command must be supplied with a list of Object names separated by commas. An error message will be displayed if the list contains any invalid Object names, but the deletion of valid Objects in the list will still be processed. Viewing a Chart
>chart <objectname>

The >chart command is used to invoke the Chart Viewer and display the specified CHART object. Chart objects and Chart Lines are created like other CCL objects. See CHART (p. 289 in CFX-Post) and CHART LINE (p. 290 in CFX-Post) for details of the valid CCL parameters for these objects.

CFX-5.5.1

Other Commands

Page 207

CFX-Post Advanced

Page 208

Other Commands

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

Power Syntax
Power Syntax Overview p. 210 Examples of Power Syntax p. 212 Predefined Power Syntax Subroutines p. 217

CFX-5.5.1

Page 209

CFX-Post Advanced

Power Syntax Overview

Programming constructs can be used within CCL for advanced usage. Rather than invent a new language, CCL takes advantage of the full range of capabilities and resources from an existing programming language, Perl. Perl statements can be embedded in between lines of simple syntax, providing capabilities such as loops, logic, and much, much more with any CCL input file. Lines of Power Syntax are identified in a CCL file by a special character ! at the start of each line. In between Perl lines, simple syntax lines may refer to Perl variables and lists. A wide range of additional functionality is made available to expert users with the use of Power Syntax including: Loops Logic and control structures Lists and arrays Subroutines with argument handling (useful for defining commonly re-used plots and procedures) Basic I/O and input processing System functions much, much more (Object programming, WorldWide Web access, simple embedded GUIs). Any of the above may be included in a CCL input file or CFX-Post Session file.

Important: You should be wary when entering certain expressions, since Power Syntax uses Perl mathematical operators. For example, in CEL, 2 2 is represented as 2^2, but in Perl, would be written 2**2. If you are unsure about the validity of an operator, you should check a Perl reference guide.

Page 210

Power Syntax Overview

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Lines of Power Syntax in a CCL file are indicated with the ! character at the beginning of the line. A preliminary example of CCL with Power Syntax can be found in Examples of Power Syntax (p. 212). There are many good reference books on Perl. Two examples are Learning Perl (ISBN 1-56592-042-2) and Programming Perl (ISBN 1-56592-149-6) from the OReilly series.

CFX-5.5.1

Power Syntax Overview

Page 211

CFX-Post Advanced

Examples of Power Syntax

The following are some examples in which the versatility of power syntax is demonstrated. They become steadily more complex in the latter examples. Some additional more complex examples of Power Syntax subroutines can be found by viewing the Session files used for the Macro Calculator. These are located in <CFX-PostROOT>/cfxpost/ <version>/etc/ and are called cpPolar.cse and compressorPerform.cse. You can execute these subroutines from the Command Editor the same as calling any other Power Syntax subroutine. The required argument format is:
!cpPolar(<"BoundaryList">, <"SliceNormalAxis">, <"SlicePosition">, <"PlotAxis">, <"InletLocation">, <"ReferencePressure">) !compressorPerform(<"InletLocation">, <"OutletLocation">, <"BladeLocation">, <"MachineAxis">, <"RotationalSpeed">, <"TipRadius">, <"NumBlades">, <"FluidGamma">)

These subroutines are loaded when CFX-Post is launched, so you do not need to execute the session files before using the functions. More information about these macro functions can be found in Compressor Performance (p. 159 in CFX-Post) and Cp Polar (p. 161 in CFX-Post). All arguments passed to subroutines should be enclosed in quotations, for example Plane 1 must be passed as Plane 1, and Eddy Viscosity should be entered as Eddy Viscosity. Any legal CFX Command Language characters that are illegal in Perl need to be enclosed in quotation marks. Example 1: Print Pressure Drop Through a Pipe
! ! ! ! $Pin = massFlowAve("Pressure","inlet"); $Pout = massFlowAve("Pressure","outlet"); $dp = $Pin-$Pout; print "The pressure drop is $dp\n";

Page 212

Examples of Power Syntax

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Example 2: Using a for Loop This example demonstrates using Power Syntax that wraps a for loop around some CCL Object definitions to repetitively change the visibility on the outer boundaries.
# Make the outer boundaries gradually transparent in # the specified number of steps. !$numsteps = 10; !for ($i=0; $i < $numsteps; $i++) { ! $trans = ($i+1)/$numsteps; BOUNDARY:in Visibility = 1 Transparency = $trans END BOUNDARY:out Visibility = 1 Transparency = $trans END BOUNDARY:Default Visibility = 1 Transparency = $trans END !}

The first line of Power Syntax simply defines a scalar variable called numsteps. Scalar variables (i.e. simple single-valued variables) begin with a $ symbol in Perl. The next line defines a for loop that increments the variable i up to numsteps. Next, we determine the fraction we are along in the loop and assign it to the variable trans. The object definitions then use trans to set their transparency and then repeat. Note how Perl variables can be directly embedded into the object definitions. The final line of Power Syntax (!}) closes the for loop. Example 3: Creating a Simple Subroutine This example defines a simple subroutine to make two planes at specified locations. The subroutine will be used in the next example.
!sub makePlanes { PLANE:plane1 Option = Point and Normal Point = 0.09,0,-0.03 Normal = 1,0,0 Draw Lines = On
CFX-5.5.1

Examples of Power Syntax

Page 213

CFX-Post Advanced

Line Colour = 1,0,0 Colour Mode = Variable Colour Variable = Pressure Range = Local END PLANE:plane2 Option = Point and Normal Point = 0.08,-0.038,-0.0474 Normal = 1,0,0 Draw Faces = Off Draw Lines = On Line Colour = 0,1,0 END !}

Although this subroutine is designed for use with the next example, you can execute it on its own by typing !makePlanes(); in the Command Editor. Example 4: Creating a Complex Quantitative Subroutine This example is a complex quantitative subroutine that takes slices through the manifold geometry shown below, compares the mass flow through the two sides of the initial branch, and computes the pressure drop through to the four exit locations.
Inlet

Outlets ! sub manifoldCalcs{ # call the previously defined subroutine (Example 3) make the
Page 214

Examples of Power Syntax

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

# upstream and downstream cutting planes ! makePlanes(); # # Bound the two planes so they each just cut one side of the branch. PLANE:plane1 Plane Bound = Circular Bound Radius = 0.025 END PLANE:plane2 Plane Bound = Circular Bound Radius = 0.025 END # Calculate mass flow through each using the predefined # 'massflow' Power Syntax subroutine and output the results ! ! ! ! ! ! $mass1 = massFlow("plane1"); $mass2 = massFlow("plane2"); $sum = $mass1+$mass2; print "Mass flow through branch 1 = $mass1\n"; print "Mass flow through branch 2 = $mass2\n"; print "Total = $sum\n";

# Now calculate pressure drops and mass flows through the exits # calculate the average pressure at the inlet !$Pin = massFlowAve("Pressure","in"); # # # ! ! ! Set-up an array that holds the approximate X location of each of the 4 exits. We then loop over the array to move the outlet plane and re-do the pressure drop calculation at each exit. @Xlocs = (0.15,0.25,0.35,0.45); $sum = 0; for ($i=0;$i<4;$i++) { PLANE:outlet Option = Point and Normal Normal = 0,-1,-1 Point = $Xlocs[$i],-0.06,-0.2 Plane Bound = Circular Bound Radius = 0.05 END ! $Pout = massFlowAve("Pressure","outlet"); ! $massFl = massFlow("outlet"); ! $sum += $massFl; ! $Dp = $Pin-$Pout; ! $ii = $i+1; ! print "At outlet \#$ii: Dp = $Dp, Mass Flow = $massFl\n"; ! } # end loop ! print "Total Mass Flow = $sum\n";
CFX-5.5.1

Examples of Power Syntax

Page 215

CFX-Post Advanced

!} # end subroutine

After processing these commands to define the subroutine, you can execute it, in the same way as any other subroutine, by typing !manifoldCalcs(); in the Command Editor.

Page 216

Examples of Power Syntax

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

Predefined Power Syntax Subroutines

This section contains subroutines to provide additional Power Syntax functionality in CFX-Post. You can view a list of these subroutines by entering !showSubs(); in the Command Editor. The list is printed to the console window. The list shows all currently loaded subroutines, so it will include any custom subroutines that you have processed in the Command Editor. These subroutines provide access to the quantitative functionality of CFX-Post. Most of these routines provide results in a single return value. For example, if the Perl variable '$verbose = 1', then the result is also printed to the screen. Details of the calculations performed by the subroutines can be found in Function Selection (p. 128 in CFXPost). Length(Location)
real Length("Location")

area(Location)
real area("Location", "Axis")

areaAve(Variable, Location)
real areaAve("Variable", "Location")

areaInt(Variable, Location, Axis)

real areaInt("Variable", "Location", "Axis")

ave(Variable, Location)
real ave("Variable", "Location")

compressorPerform() For details, please see Compressor Performance (p. 159). For example:
compressorPerform("Inlet", "Outlet", "Blade", "X", 600, 0.03, 10, 1.2)
CFX-5.5.1

Predened Power Syntax Subroutines

Page 217

CFX-Post Advanced

copyFile(string source, string target) A utility function that copies source file to target file with Windows/Unix dependencies taken into consideration. Current assumes Unix. count(Location)
real count("Location")

cpPolar() For details, please see Cp Polar (p. 161). For example
cpPolar("Plane 1", "Y", 0.3, "X", "Inlet", 10000)

evaluate(Expression)
real,string evaluate("Expression")

force(Location,Axis)
real force("Location", "Axis")

forceNorm(Location,Axis)
real forceNorm("Location", "Axis")

getValue(Object Name, Parameter Name) A utility function that takes a CCL object and parameter name and returns the value of the parameter. lengthAve(Variable,Location)
real lengthAve("Variable", "Location")

lengthInt(Variable,Location)
real lengthInt("Variable", "Location")

massFlow(Location)
real massFlow("Location")
Page 218

Predened Power Syntax Subroutines

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

massFlowAve(Variable, Location)
real massFlowAve("Variable", "Location")

massFlowInt(Variable, Location)
real massFlowInt("Variable","Location")

maxVal(Variable, Location)
real maxVal("Variable", "Location")

minVal(Variable, Location)
real minVal("Variable", "Location")

probe(Variable, Location)
real probe("Variable", "Location")

Important: This calculation should only be performed for point locators described by single points. Incorrect solutions will be produced for multiple point locators.

range(Variable, Location).
(real, real) range("Variable", "Location")

showPkgs() void showPkgs() A content subroutine that prints a list of packages available which may contain other variables or subroutines in Power Syntax. showSubs()
void showSubs("String packageName")

CFX-5.5.1

Predened Power Syntax Subroutines

Page 219

CFX-Post Advanced

A content subroutine that prints a list of the subroutines available in the specified package. If no package is specified, CFX-Post is used by default. showVars()
void showVars("String packageName")

A content subroutine that prints a list of the Power Syntax variables and their current value defined in the specified package. If no package is specified, CFX-Post is used by default. sum(Variable,Location)
real sum("Variable", "Location")

torque(Location,Axis)
real torque("Location", "Axis")

verboseOn() Returns 1 or 0 depending if the Perl variable $verbose is set to 1. volume(Locator)

real volume("Locator")

volumeAve(Variable, Location)
real volumeAve("Variable", "Location")

volumeInt(Variable, Locator)
real volumeInt("Variable", "Location")

Page 220

Predened Power Syntax Subroutines

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

Line Interface Mode

Line Interface Mode (p. 222) Batch Mode (p. 226)

CFX-5.5.1

Page 221

CFX-Post Advanced

Line Interface Mode

All of the functionality of CFX-Post can be accessed when running in Line Interface mode. This section contains information on how to perform typical user actions (loading, printing, etc.), creating graphical objects and performing quantitative calculations when running CFX-Post in Line Interface mode. In Line Interface mode you are simply entering the commands which would otherwise be issued by the GUI. A Viewer is provided in a separate window which will show the geometry and the objects that create on the command line. To run in Line Interface mode: Windows: Execute the command <CFXROOT>\bin\cfx5post -line at the DOS command prompt (omitting the -line option will start the GUI mode). You may wish to change the size of the MS-DOS window to view the output from commands such as getstate. This can be done by entering mode con lines=X at the Command Prompt BEFORE entering CFX-Post, where X is the number of lines to display in the window. You can choose a large number of lines if you wish to be able to see all the output from a session (scroll bar will be used in the DOS window). It should be noted that filepaths entered once inside CFX-Post should contain a forward slash / and not the backslash, which is required in MS-DOS. UNIX: Execute the command <CFXROOT>/bin/cfxpost -line at the command prompt (omitting the -line option will start the GUI mode). In CFX-Post Line Interface mode, all commands are assumed to be actions, the > symbol required in the Command Editor is not needed. All of the functionality available from the Command Editor window (see Command Editor (p. 157 in CFX-Post)) in the GUI is available in Line Interface mode by typing enterccl or e at the command prompt. When in e mode you can enter any set of valid CCL command. The commands are not processed until you leave e mode by typing .e. You can cancel e mode without processing the commands by typing .c.

Page 222

Line Interface Mode

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

For an explanation and list of command actions, please see Overview of Command Actions (p. 186 in CFX-Post) (the action commands shown in this link are preceded by the > symbol, this should be omitted when entering action commands at the command prompt.) You can create objects by entering the CCL definition of the object (CCL Objects (p. 230 in CFX-Post) and CCL Parameters (p. 297 in CFX-Post)) when in e mode, or by reading the object definition from a session or state file (File Operations from the Command Editor (p. 188 in CFX-Post)) As a reminder, Line Interface mode differs from the Command Editor because Line Interface action commands are not preceded by > symbol, In the same way, when entering lines of CCL or Power Syntax, e must be typed (whereas this is not required in the Command Editor). It should be noted that these are the only principal differences, and all commands that work for the Command Editor will also work in Line Interface mode, providing the correct syntax is used. Some commands specific to Line Interface Mode are listed below. Lists of commands To call up a list of valid commands, type help at the command prompt. Viewer hotkeys The zoom, rotate, pan and other mouse actions available for manipulating the Viewer in the GUI perform identical functions in the Viewer in Line Interface mode. In addition to this hotkeys can be used to manipulate other aspects of the Viewer. For a full list of all the hotkeys available click in the Viewer to make it the active window and press the ? key. To execute a hotkey command, click once in the Viewer (or on the object, as some functions are object-specific) and type the command. Calculator When evaluated on the command line, the result is simply printed to standard output.

CFX-5.5.1

Line Interface Mode

Page 223

CFX-Post Advanced

For a list of valid calculator functions and required parameters, type calculate help at the command prompt. More information is also available in Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor (p. 201 in CFX-Post). getstate Command The list of all currently defined objects can be obtained using the getstate command. To get details on a specific object, type getstate <ObjectName>. Viewing a Chart You can view a Chart object in the Chart Viewer using the chart <ChartObjectName> command. See CHART (p. 289 in CFX-Post) and CHART LINE (p. 290 in CFX-Post) for details of valid CCL parameters for these objects. Repeating CCL Commands If you wish to carry out the last CCL command again, type =. Executing a Shell Command If you wish to carry out a shell command, type % directly before your command. For example, %ls will list all the files in your current directory. Quitting CFX-Post can be shut down by typing the quit command at the command prompt. Example The following example provides a set of commands that you could enter at the CFX> command prompt. The output written to the screen when executing these commands is not shown. <CFX-PostROOT> should be replaced with the file path to your installation of CFX-Post.

Page 224

Line Interface Mode

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

CFX> load filename=<CFXROOT>/examples/5.5.1/StaticMixer.res CFX> getstate Default CFX> e BOUNDARY:Default Visibility = On Transparency = 0.5 END .e CFX>

CFX-5.5.1

Line Interface Mode

Page 225

CFX-Post Advanced

Batch Mode
All of the functionality of CFX-Post can be accessed when running in Batch mode. When running in batch mode a Viewer window is not provided and you cannot enter commands at a command prompt. Commands are issued via a CFX-Post Session file (*.cse), the name of which is specified when executing the command to start Batch mode. The Session file can be created using a text editor, or, more easily, by recording a Session file while running in Line Interface or GUI mode. The last command of any Session file used in Batch mode must be >quit, if this is not the case you will become locked in Batch mode and will have to terminate CFX-Post. You can leave a Session file recording while you quit from GUI or Line Interface mode to write the >quit command to a Session file. Alternatively you can use a text editor to add this command to the end of a Session file. To run in Batch mode execute the following command at the command prompt:

Windows UNIX

<CFXROOT>\bin\5.5.1\cfx5post -batch <filename.cse> <CFXROOT>/bin/5.5.1/cfx5post -batch <filename.cse>

You can include the name of a results file in your session file, this is described in the example below. However, you can also pass the name of a results file and a session to CFX-Post from the command line. This allows you to apply a generic session file to a series of different results files. To launch CFX-Post in batch file mode, load a results file and execute the statements in a session file use the following command:

Windows UNIX

<CFXROOT>\bin\5.5.1\cfx5post -batch <filename.cse> <filename.res> <CFXROOT>/bin/5.5.1/cfx5post -batch <filename.cse> <filename.res>

Example: Pressure Calculation on Multiple Files using Batch Mode

This example will calculate the value of Pressure at a point in each of three results files.

Page 226

Batch Mode

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Advanced

The purpose of this example is for demonstration only. You will only deal with three results files in this case, and it would be faster to produce the output by using the GUI. These features can, however, be useful in situations where a large number of results files need to be processed at once. In order to carry out this procedure, you will make use of session files, power syntax and the command editor. This example will make use of the results from the Static Mixer Tutorial (Flow in a Static Mixer (p. 11 in CFX-5 Tutorials)), the Buoyancy 2D Tutorial (2D Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity (p. 235 in CFX-5 Tutorials)) and the Reactor Tutorial (Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube (p. 393 in CFX-5 Tutorials)). You can use the results from any file by making the appropriate substitutions in the following example. You will first create a session file based on the first results file. First of all copy the results files to your current working directory. Start CFX-Post and select File>Load Results. Select the static mixer results file StaticMixer_001.res. (Your results file may have a slightly different name). Select Session>New Session from the Session menu (Full instructions on the Session menu can be found in Session Menu (p. 37 in CFX-Post)). Enter batchtest.cse as the session file name and click Save. Click on the icon to begin recording the session file commands.

Select Create>Point and accept the default name Point 1. You will now use Power Syntax to find the value of Pressure at Point 1, and print it to the command line. As well as printing the value of pressure, it would be useful to know the name of the results file. You will make use of the DATA READER object to find the name of the current results file. Select Tools>Command Editor. Enter the following into the command window:
! $filePath = getValue("DATA READER","Current Results File");

Click Process to process the command.

CFX-5.5.1

Batch Mode

Page 227

CFX-Post Advanced

Now enter the following:

! $pressureVal = probe("Pressure","Point 1"); ! print "\nFor results file $filePath, Pressure is $pressureVal\n";

Check your terminal window to make sure the command worked as desired. This completes the first part of the example. Click on the icon to stop recording the session file. You may wish to close down CFX-Post at this time. You can now run the session file on any number of results files using the command: <CFXROOT>/bin/5.5.1/cfx5post -batch testbatch.cse <resfile> where <resfile> is the name of your results file. You can re-run the command by typing in another results file name. For a very large number of results files, a simple script can be used to pass filenames as command line arguments. As an example, this C shell script would pass arguments as results file names to the CFX-Post command line. #!/bin/csh foreach file ($argv) <CFXROOT>/5.5.1/cfx5post -batch testbatch.cse $file end

Page 228

Batch Mode

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

CFX-Post

CCL Details
CCL Objects p. 230 CCL Parameters p. 297

CFX-5.5.1

Page 229

CFX-Post Appendix

CCL Objects UNIT SYSTEM

Description Singleton Object: This object stores the preferred units. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Preferred Units System : This specifies the Units System to use. Optional Parameters Update Units to Preferred : This logical indicates whether all displayed units should always be updated to display the preferred units. If this is false',quantities will be converted to preferred types.' Custom Units Setting : This is a comma delimited list of Quantities and their selected units for the Custom Units Setting. The list will contain both Quantities and the units: e.g. Acceleration, m s^-2, Angle, radian, ...

STREAMLINE
Description Named Object: Calculates streamline plots, and eventually ribbons and tubes Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Location List : A comma delimited list of locator names. Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects.
Page 230

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Variable : The name of the variable used to create the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Streamline Maximum Segments : Stops streamline calculation when number of segments exceeds this Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Streamline Direction : The direction in which streams are to be calculated Tolerance Mode : whether Grid Tolerance or Absolute Tolerance are used Grid Tolerance : Fraction of local grid size to use as a maximum step tolerance Absolute Tolerance : Length to use as a maximum step tolerance Cross Periodics : If true allows a streamline to cross a periodic boundary Draw Symbols : Draw symbols on the streams at specified times Draw Streams : If false do not draw streams, but allow drawing of symbols Symbol Start Time : The particle age at which to draw the first symbol Symbol Stop Time : Draw no symbols with particle age lower than this Symbol Time Interval : Draw symbols at regular times separated by this value Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 231

CFX-Post Appendix

Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Symbol Size : A scaling factor for all symbols in the plot. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object.

Page 232

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Streamline Maximum Time : Stops streamline calculation when particle age exceeds this Streamline Solver Type : The solver to use to calculate the streamlines Reduction Factor : Reduces the number of nodes of a locator to use Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer. Streamline Maximum Periods : Limits the number of times a streamline may cross a periodic boundary Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: Line,Ribbon,Tube Option = Ribbon Essential Parameters Ribbon Width : The initial width of stream ribbons Stream Ribbon Initial Direction : Defines the initial plane of a stream ribbon Option = Tube Essential Parameters Number of Sides : The number of sides of a round'tube' Optional Parameters Tube Diameter : The initial width of stream tubes
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 233

CFX-Post Appendix

ROOT
Description Singleton Object: The ROOT object lists all the object types that can be defined in CFX-Post. Allowed Sub-Objects Optional Sub-Objects UNIT SYSTEM : This object stores the preferred units. STREAMLINE : Calculates streamline plots, and eventually ribbons and tubes LIBRARY : LIBRARY is automatically read from the VARIABLES library file. POINT : Defines a point using X, Y and Z coordinates. POLYLINE : A locator defined by multiple sets of points read from a data file or by the intersection of a boundary and a locator.The points may have local (path) variables associated with them. The polyline can interact with CFD data and can be coloured using path variables or domain variables. SUBDOMAIN : A volume region of a domain defined as a subdomain. BOUNDARY : A locator defined by a boundary condition that exists in the results file. WIREFRAME : Plots an outline of the domain given by edges between elements with greater than the specified angle. VECTOR : Creates a vector plot on a given list of locators. SYMBOL : An internal object representing a plotting symbol. ISOSURFACE : A locator generated by the surface which passes through a constant value of a specified variable.

Page 234

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

USER SURFACE : Allows the user to read an external file while contains elements describing a general 3D surface, with local variable values optionally specified on each node. The surface can interact with CFD data and can be coloured using local variables or domain variables. PLANE : A general object to describe a plane through the domain. Slice planes (which can be bounded) and sample planes are supported. CLIP PLANE : Defines a plane that can be used to clip graphics in the viewer. VOLUME : An object that contains a subset of the volume elements of the domains it is defined on. Options are provided to specify how that subset is defined. LINE : Defines a line object. CONTOUR : Creates a contour plot on a given list of locators. SURFACE GROUP : Creates a group of surface plot on a given list of locators. HARDCOPY : This object contains the settings used to control the creation of hardcopy output from the viewer. It is used by the "print" action. DATA READER : This object contains the settings used to read results files into the post-processor. It is used by the "load" action. EXPORT : Holds parameters which control the export of data to an external text file. SESSION : Stores parameters used by the readsession command. STATE : Stores parameters used by the readstate and savestate commands. VIEWER : This object stores the viewer settings. DOMAIN : An automatically created object for each domain read from the results file. VECTOR VARIABLE : A object used to reference the data associated with a vector quantity in the results file.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 235

CFX-Post Appendix

SCALAR VARIABLE : A object used to reference the data associated with a scalar quantity in the results file. USER SCALAR VARIABLE : A object used to reference user-defined data. EXPRESSIONS : This object holds the definitions of all CEL expressions in the post-processor. ANIMATION : Defines a Keyframe animation sequence. A list of KEYFRAME objects indicate the states between which to interpolate. KEYFRAME : Defines a specific keyframe for an animation sequence. The actual system state is stored in a file referenced by the Keyframe Filename parameter.' GROUP : Allows a group of multiple objects to behave as a single object. Currently only used internally and does not work for graphics, etc. DEFAULT INSTANCE TRANSFORM : Specifies the default instance transformation. INSTANCE TRANSFORM : Specifies an instance transformation that can consist of a rotation,a translation, a reflection and a number of copies of the original object to produce. Note that applying reflection duplicates the number of copies. REFLECTION PLANE : This is a sub-object used for the reflection plane definition in TRANSFORM object. CAMERA : Defines a camera that can be used to specify the current view in the VIEWER object. LEGEND : Creates a labelled colour bar to show to legend associated with the named plot. TEXT : A single piece of text. This text item can be attached to a point on screen (specified in two dimensions), or attached to a point in three dimensions, following that point through any viewer transformations. Font, size, colour, rotation and justification options are provided. COORD FRAME : Defines a coordinate frame which can be used for setting direction and axis specifications.

Page 236

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

CHART : This object is used to create a chart and specify general chart parameters, including the CHART LINE objects that define the chart lines. CHART LINE : This object defines the variable, line style, symbol style, and colours to use for a chart line. CALCULATOR : This singleton is used by the calculate action to define the function and arguments to be evaluated, and store the Result. MESH CALCULATOR : This singleton is used by the mesh calculate action to define the function to be evaluated, and store the max and min Results. EXPRESSION EVALUATOR : This singleton evaluates the specified Expression and stores the Result.

LIBRARY
Description Singleton Object: LIBRARY is automatically read from the VARIABLES library file.

POINT
Description Named Object: Defines a point using X, Y and Z coordinates. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Optional Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 237

CFX-Post Appendix

Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object.

Page 238

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Point Symbol : Name of point symbol (non-directional) to be used for plot. Symbol Size : A scaling factor for all symbols in the plot. Normalized : If set On, all vectors are plotted with the same length (show direction only). Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: XYZ, Node Number, Variable Minimum, Variable Maximum Option = XYZ Optional Parameters Point : An XYZ triple which defines a point in space. Option = Node Number Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Node Number :

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 239

CFX-Post Appendix

Option = Variable Minimum Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Location : A locator name. Variable : The name of the variable used to create the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Option = Variable Maximum Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Location : A locator name. Variable : The name of the variable used to create the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object.

POLYLINE
Description Named Object: A locator defined by multiple sets of points read from a data file or by the intersection of a boundary and a locator.The points may have local (path) variables associated with them. The polyline can interact with CFD data and can be coloured using path variables or domain variables. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Optional Parameters

Page 240

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: From File, Boundary Intersection

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 241

CFX-Post Appendix

Option = From File Essential Parameters Input File : The name of the file to be read that contains the definition of one or more polylines and associated path variables. Option = Boundary Intersection Essential Parameters Location : A locator name. Boundary List : A list of boundary objects Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object.

SUBDOMAIN
Description Named Object: A volume region of a domain defined as a subdomain. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object.

Page 242

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 243

CFX-Post Appendix

Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer.

BOUNDARY
Description Named Object: A locator defined by a boundary condition that exists in the results file. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer.

Page 244

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer. Internal Parameters Solver Name : The name of this object inside the RES file. Boundary Type : Internal parameter tells the type of the boundary. Periodicity Type : Says whether the boundary is periodic in rotation or translation Rotation Axis From : An XYZ triple defining the first point of the rotation axis.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 245

CFX-Post Appendix

Rotation Axis To : An XYZ triple defining the second point of the rotation axis. Rotation Angle : Specifies the rotation angle. Translation Vector : Specifies the translation vector. Opposite Boundary List : The boundaries that form the other side of a periodic link Interface Type : Matches the solver CCL parameter, saying what kind of GGI interface this is

WIREFRAME
Description Named Object: Plots an outline of the domain given by edges between elements with greater than the specified angle. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Edge Angle : The angle between two faces used to limit visible edges in a wireframe. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer.

Page 246

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

VECTOR
Description Named Object: Creates a vector plot on a given list of locators. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Location List : A comma delimited list of locator names. Variable : The name of the variable used to create the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Optional Parameters Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 247

CFX-Post Appendix

Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Normalized : If set On, all vectors are plotted with the same length (show direction only). Symbol : Name of symbol to be used for the plot. Symbol Size : A scaling factor for all symbols in the plot. Projection Type : The vector projection type to be used in creating this plot. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Direction : The direction specification for vector coord frame projection. Reduction Factor : Reduces the number of nodes of a locator to use Surface Sampling : If set On, results are displayed at a subset of points in the plot. Number of Samples : The number of random samples to be taken in the plot. Random Seed : The seed to be used in the sampling of points on the plot. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer.
Page 248

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer.

SYMBOL
Description Named Object: An internal object representing a plotting symbol. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Symbol Type : The category a symbol falls under. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Symbol Type Allowed Context Settings: Arrow2D, Arrow3D, Crosshair, Octahedron, Line Arrow, Arrowhead

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 249

CFX-Post Appendix

Symbol Type = Arrow2D Symbol Type = Arrow3D Symbol Type = Crosshair Symbol Type = Octahedron Symbol Type = Line Arrow Symbol Type = Arrowhead

ISOSURFACE
Description Named Object: A locator generated by the surface which passes through a constant value of a specified variable. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Variable : The name of the variable used to create the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Value : The value of the variable at which the isosurface is to be plotted. Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour.

Page 250

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 251

CFX-Post Appendix

Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer.

USER SURFACE
Description Named Object: Allows the user to read an external file while contains elements describing a general 3D surface, with local variable values optionally specified on each node. The surface can interact with CFD data and can be coloured using local variables or domain variables. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Optional Parameters Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid).

Page 252

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 253

CFX-Post Appendix

Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: From File, Boundary Intersection Option = From File Essential Parameters Input File : The name of the file to be read that contains the definition of one or more polylines and associated path variables. Option = Boundary Intersection Essential Parameters Location : A locator name. Boundary List : A list of boundary objects Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object.

PLANE
Description Named Object: A general object to describe a plane through the domain. Slice planes (which can be bounded) and sample planes are supported. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object.
Page 254

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 255

CFX-Post Appendix

Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Plane Bound : Defines plane bounding (Circular, Rectangular, None). Bound Radius : Radius of Circular Plane Bound. Direction 1 Bound : Length of Rectangular Plane Bound. Direction 2 Bound : Width of Rectangular Plane Bound. Direction 1 Orientation : Orientation of Rectangular Plane Bound length. Direction 1 Points : Number of Sample points in direction 1. Direction 2 Points : Number of Sample points in direction 2. Plane Type : Indicates if the plane is a slice or sample plane. Invert Plane Bound : Reverses the plane bounds by selecting region outside plane bound. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: XY Plane, YZ Plane, ZX Plane, Point and Normal, Three Points Option = YZ Plane Optional Parameters
Page 256

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

X : The X coordinate value for the location of this object. Option = ZX Plane Optional Parameters Y : The Y coordinate value for the location of this object. Option = XY Plane Optional Parameters Z : The Z coordinate value for the location of this object. Option = Point and Normal Optional Parameters Point : An XYZ triple which defines a point in space. Normal : An XYZ triple describing the normal vector. Option = Three Points Optional Parameters Point 1 : An XYZ triple defining the first point for this object. Point 2 : An XYZ triple defining the second point for this object. Point 3 : An XYZ triple defining the third point for this object.

CLIP PLANE
Description Named Object: Defines a plane that can be used to clip graphics in the viewer. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 257

CFX-Post Appendix

Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Optional Parameters Flip Normal : If this parameter is set to true, the normal of the clip plane will be flipped, effectively inverting the clipping region. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: XY Plane, YZ Plane, ZX Plane, Point and Normal, Three Points, From Slice Plane Option = YZ Plane Optional Parameters X : The X coordinate value for the location of this object. Option = ZX Plane Optional Parameters Y : The Y coordinate value for the location of this object. Option = XY Plane Optional Parameters Z : The Z coordinate value for the location of this object. Option = Point and Normal Optional Parameters Point : An XYZ triple which defines a point in space. Normal : An XYZ triple describing the normal vector. Option = Three Points Optional Parameters Point 1 : An XYZ triple defining the first point for this object.
Page 258

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Point 2 : An XYZ triple defining the second point for this object. Point 3 : An XYZ triple defining the third point for this object. Option = From Slice Plane Optional Parameters Slice Plane : Specifies the name of the PLANE object to use for the clip plane definition.

VOLUME
Description Named Object: An object that contains a subset of the volume elements of the domains it is defined on. Options are provided to specify how that subset is defined. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 259

CFX-Post Appendix

Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Inclusive : If this parameter set to true, then the volume for above or below intersection includes intersections .

Page 260

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: Sphere, From Surface, Isovolume Option = Sphere Optional Parameters Point : An XYZ triple which defines a point in space. Radius : Radius distance for sphere volume. Option = From Surface Optional Parameters Location List : A comma delimited list of locator names. Volume Intersection Mode : A parameter used to define the context setting for volume object. Option = Isovolume Optional Parameters Isovolume Intersection Mode : A parameter used to define the context setting for isovolume object. Variable : The name of the variable used to create the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Value 1 : The value of the variable at which the isovolume is to be plotted.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 261

CFX-Post Appendix

Value 2 : The value of the variable at which the isovolume is to be plotted it is used when the isovolume mode is between values.

LINE
Description Named Object: Defines a line object. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object.

Page 262

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Line Type : Indicates if the line is a cut or sample line. Line Samples : Number of points in the sample line. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: Two Points Option = Two Points Optional Parameters Point 1 : An XYZ triple defining the first point for this object. Point 2 : An XYZ triple defining the second point for this object.

CONTOUR
Description Named Object: Creates a contour plot on a given list of locators.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 263

CFX-Post Appendix

Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Location List : A comma delimited list of locator names. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Number of Contours : Specifies number of contour lines in a contour plot. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Contour Range : Sets the method used to calculate a contour plot."Global" uses the range of variable values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the specified list of objects. "User Specified" uses Min and Max parameter value. "Value List" plots contours on the values specified in Value List parameter. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Value List : Specifies a list of variable values for a contour plot. In order for this list to be used, Contour Range has to be set to "Value List". Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object.
Page 264

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Constant Contour Colour : If set to On, then the "Line Colour" parameter is used to determine the contour colour. Otherwise, the contour is coloured by the contour variable. Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Show Numbers : Toggles contour numbering. Draw Contours : Enables/disables drawing of the contour lines. Fringe Fill : If set to On, the space between contours in a contour plot is filled with fringe bands. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer. Text Height : The height an item of text should be, proportional to the screen. Font : The font name for an item of text. Text Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the text.

SURFACE GROUP
Description Named Object: Creates a group of surface plot on a given list of locators.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 265

CFX-Post Appendix

Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Location List : A comma delimited list of locator names. Optional Parameters Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Colour Mode : Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Colour Variable : The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Colour Variable Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Range : Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object. Min : The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Max : The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Transparency : Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer. Draw Faces : Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer.

Page 266

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Surface Drawing : Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Draw Lines : Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Line Width : Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Line Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Domain List : The list of domains over which to define this object. Lighting : Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer. Specular Lighting : Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Culling Mode : Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Instancing Transform : Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Apply Instancing Transform : Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer.

HARDCOPY
Description Singleton Object: This object contains the settings used to control the creation of hardcopy output from the viewer. It is used by the "print" action. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Hardcopy Format : Sets the format of hardcopy output from "print". Optional Parameters Hardcopy Filename : Sets the file name for the output from "print".
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 267

CFX-Post Appendix

Hardcopy Tolerance : A non-dimensional tolerance used in facesorting when generating hardcopy output. Smaller values will result in faster printing times, but may cause defects in the resulting output. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Hardcopy Format Allowed Context Settings: ps, eps, jpg, ppm, bmp, png, vrml Hardcopy Format = ps Optional Parameters Paper Size : Scales hardcopy output to the specified paper size. Print Quality : Controls quality vs. speed of hardcopy output. Paper Orientation : Sets the rotation of the image on the printed page. White Background : Toggles if hardcopy output is produced on a white or black background. Print Line Width : The width of lines in hardcopy output. Increasing this value may give better results on high-resolution printers. Hardcopy Format = eps Optional Parameters Paper Size : Scales hardcopy output to the specified paper size. Print Quality : Controls quality vs. speed of hardcopy output. Paper Orientation : Sets the rotation of the image on the printed page. White Background : Toggles if hardcopy output is produced on a white or black background. Print Line Width : The width of lines in hardcopy output. Increasing this value may give better results on high-resolution printers. Hardcopy Format = bmp Optional Parameters
Page 268

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Print Quality : Controls quality vs. speed of hardcopy output. White Background : Toggles if hardcopy output is produced on a white or black background. Image Scale : Scales the size of bitmap images to a fraction (in percent) of the current viewer window size. Print Line Width : The width of lines in hardcopy output. Increasing this value may give better results on high-resolution printers. Screen Capture : Enables the screen capture mode for producing image output. Hardcopy Format = jpg Optional Parameters Print Quality : Controls quality vs. speed of hardcopy output. White Background : Toggles if hardcopy output is produced on a white or black background. Image Scale : Scales the size of bitmap images to a fraction (in percent) of the current viewer window size. Print Line Width : The width of lines in hardcopy output. Increasing this value may give better results on high-resolution printers. Screen Capture : Enables the screen capture mode for producing image output. JPEG Image Quality : The quality factor for jpeg image output. Higher values results in clearer, but larger, files. Hardcopy Format = png Optional Parameters Print Quality : Controls quality vs. speed of hardcopy output. White Background : Toggles if hardcopy output is produced on a white or black background. Image Scale : Scales the size of bitmap images to a fraction (in percent) of the current viewer window size.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 269

CFX-Post Appendix

Print Line Width : The width of lines in hardcopy output. Increasing this value may give better results on high-resolution printers. Screen Capture : Enables the screen capture mode for producing image output. Hardcopy Format = ppm Optional Parameters Print Quality : Controls quality vs. speed of hardcopy output. White Background : Toggles if hardcopy output is produced on a white or black background. Image Scale : Scales the size of bitmap images to a fraction (in percent) of the current viewer window size. Print Line Width : The width of lines in hardcopy output. Increasing this value may give better results on high-resolution printers. Screen Capture : Enables the screen capture mode for producing image output.

DATA READER
Description Singleton Object: This object contains the settings used to read results files into the post-processor. It is used by the "load" action. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Current Results File : The name of the results file to be read into the post-processor. Optional Parameters Current Timestep : The timestep to be used when reading a transient results file.

Page 270

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Current Timevalue : The time value to be used when reading a transient results file. Temporary Directory : The path to a temporary working directory which CFX-Post can use for placing temporary files. This directory does not have to exist between runs of CFX-Post, and the contents will be deleted when Post shuts down. Internal Parameters Current File Type : The type of the results file to be read into the postprocessor. This is an internal parameter. Current Results File Version : The version of the current results file.

EXPORT
Description Singleton Object: Holds parameters which control the export of data to an external text file. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Export File : The filename to which the exported data will be written. Optional Parameters Location List : A comma delimited list of locator names. Variable List : A comma delimited list of variables whose data is to be exported. Include Header : Indicates whether a pre-defined header is appended to the top of the export file, using ` Null Token : The string that should be used in the export file if no data exists for a variable at a node. Overwrite : Indicates whether, if the specified filename exists, the file should be overwritten with the new data.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 271

CFX-Post Appendix

Precision : Indicates the number of decimal points of precision to display the exported data to. Vector Display : Indicates the way that vector variables are to be displayed. Choices are: Components | Scalar. Separator : Indicates the string to use between each variable. The string must be delimited by quotation marks. Vector Brackets : Indicates the kind of brackets to use around vector data when displayed as components. Any two character combination is valid, where the first character will be used as the open-bracket, and the second as the close-bracket. If "-" is specified (no quotes), no brackets will be displayed.

SESSION
Description Singleton Object: Stores parameters used by the readsession command. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Session Filename : The name of the session file to which session data will be saved. Optional Parameters Write Session Mode : This parameter indicates whether the session file should be overwritten or appended to if it exists.

STATE
Description Singleton Object: Stores parameters used by the readstate and savestate commands.

Page 272

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters State Filename : The name of the state file to which state data will be saved. Optional Parameters Read State Mode : This parameter indicates whether the current system state information should be overwritten or appended to. Save State Mode : This parameter indicates whether the state file should be overwritten if it exists. Load Data : This parameter indicates whether to load the results file or not if a DATA READER object exists in the STATE File for a READSTATE action. Save State Objects : A list of objects to save to the state file. If this list is empty, then all user created objects will be saved.

VIEWER
Description Singleton Object: This object stores the viewer settings. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Camera Mode : Defines the current viewer camera mode. It can be either Standard (specified by Standard View parameter) or User Specified, in which case a CAMERA object has to be defined and specified in User Camera parameter. User Camera : Defines the CAMERA object that is used to set up the camera view in the viewer (Note that Camera Mode has to be set to User Specified for this parameter to have effect). Standard View : Defines one of the standard views in the viewer (Note that Camera Mode has to be set to Standard for this parameter to have effect).
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 273

CFX-Post Appendix

Background Colour : Defines the R, G and B values for the viewer background colour. Projection : Defines the current projection mode in the viewer. It can be either Perspective or Orthographic. Axis Visibility : Toggles the axis visibility in the viewer. Border Visibility : Toggles the viewport border visibility in the viewer. Light Angle : Defines the viewer light angles in degrees. The first angle goes from left (0) to right (180), and the second goes from up (0) to down (180). Clip Scene : Toggles the scene clipping plane in the viewer. Clip Plane : Defines the CLIP PLANE object that is used for scene clipping.

DOMAIN
Description Named Object: An automatically created object for each domain read from the results file.

VECTOR VARIABLE
Description Named Object: A object used to reference the data associated with a vector quantity in the results file. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for this variable (Conservative or Hybrid).

Page 274

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

User Units : Specifies the preferred units to display this variable in if different from the default units setting. To use the default units, this parameter must be empty (blank). Internal Parameters VarMin : The global minimum value from this variable as read from the RES file. VarMax : The global maximum value from this variable as read from the RES file. HybridMin : The global hybrid minimum value from this variable as read from the RES file. HybridMax : The global hybrid maximum value from this variable as read from the RES file. Variable Dimensions : The dimensions of the variable as read from the results file. Base Units : The base units of a variable. Has Hybrid Values : Internal parameter specifying whether a variable can load Hybrid Values on boundary nodes. User Level : Specifies the user level of the variable. Quantity Type : Specifies the Quantity Type of the variable.

SCALAR VARIABLE
Description Named Object: A object used to reference the data associated with a scalar quantity in the results file. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for this variable (Conservative or Hybrid).

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 275

CFX-Post Appendix

User Units : Specifies the preferred units to display this variable in if different from the default units setting. To use the default units, this parameter must be empty (blank). Internal Parameters VarMin : The global minimum value from this variable as read from the RES file. VarMax : The global maximum value from this variable as read from the RES file. HybridMin : The global hybrid minimum value from this variable as read from the RES file. HybridMax : The global hybrid maximum value from this variable as read from the RES file. Variable Dimensions : The dimensions of the variable as read from the results file. Base Units : The base units of a variable. Variable : The name of the variable used to create the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Component Index : Specifies vector component to be used for the variable. Recipe : Contains instructions on how to build a value list for the variable. Has Hybrid Values : Internal parameter specifying whether a variable can load Hybrid Values on boundary nodes. User Level : Specifies the user level of the variable. Quantity Type : Specifies the Quantity Type of the variable. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Recipe Allowed Context Settings: Standard, Vector Component

Page 276

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Recipe = Standard Optional Parameters Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for this variable (Conservative or Hybrid). Recipe = Vector Component

USER SCALAR VARIABLE

Description Named Object: A object used to reference user-defined data. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Boundary Values : Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for this variable (Conservative or Hybrid). User Units : Specifies the preferred units to display this variable in if different from the default units setting. To use the default units, this parameter must be empty (blank). Recipe : Contains instructions on how to build a value list for the variable. Internal Parameters VarMin : The global minimum value from this variable as read from the RES file. VarMax : The global maximum value from this variable as read from the RES file. HybridMin : The global hybrid minimum value from this variable as read from the RES file. HybridMax : The global hybrid maximum value from this variable as read from the RES file.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 277

CFX-Post Appendix

Variable Dimensions : The dimensions of the variable as read from the results file. Base Units : The base units of a variable. Has Hybrid Values : Internal parameter specifying whether a variable can load Hybrid Values on boundary nodes. Quantity Type : Specifies the Quantity Type of the variable. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Recipe Allowed Context Settings: Expression Recipe = Expression Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression.

EXPRESSIONS
Description Singleton Object: This object holds the definitions of all CEL expressions in the post-processor.

ANIMATION
Description Singleton Object: Defines a Keyframe animation sequence. A list of KEYFRAME objects indicate the states between which to interpolate. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Animation Name : The name of this animation.
Page 278

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Animation Filename : The name of the file to save this animation to. Keyframe List : An ordered list of keyframe names to be used for this animation. Looping : Indicates the type of looping to perform for the animation. Looping Cycles : Indicates the number of cycles that the Animation loop should complete before stopping automatically. A value of -1 will repeat the cycles forever. Timestep Interpolation Method : Indicates what timestep information to interpolate if timesteps are to be animated. Frame Increment : The number of frames to increment the frame counter by when incrementing to go to the next frame. Animate Camera : Indicates whether to animate the camera (flythrough)along with the other objects, or leave the camera at the current position. Save Hardcopy : Boolean indicating whether to save the current animation to a file, as it progresses. A filename needs to be specified. Animation Hardcopy Filename : The path of the file to save a hardcopy to. Intermediate File Format : The format in which to save intermediate files when generating animation MPEGs. Keep Intermediate Files : Boolean indicating whether or not CFXPost should delete the intermediate files after the MPEG generation is complete. Animation Frame Rate : The Frame Rate at which to generate the Animation MPEG. MPEG Scale : The amount to scale the viewer image for the Animation MPEG output. White Background : Toggles if hardcopy output is produced on a white or black background. Screen Capture : Enables the screen capture mode for producing image output. Internal Parameters
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 279

CFX-Post Appendix

Current Frame : The current frame that is displayed or calculated. This is useful to determine where in the animation you are when stepping through the frames. This is an internal parameter for status display purposes only. Playback Status : This parameter indicates whether the animation is stopped or playing forward or backward. This is an internal parameter for status display purposes only.

KEYFRAME
Description Named Object: Defines a specific keyframe for an animation sequence. The actual system state is stored in a file referenced by the Keyframe Filename 'parameter.' Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Keyframe Name : A string containing the name of the keyframe to display to the user. Number Of Frames : The number of frames in the animation to insert between this keyframe and the next. Keyframe Filename : A string containing the name of the state file associated with this keyframe.

GROUP
Description Named Object: Allows a group of multiple objects to behave as a single object. Currently only used internally and does not work for graphics, etc. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters
Page 280

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Member List : A list of objects included in the group.

DEFAULT INSTANCE TRANSFORM

Description Named Object: Specifies the default instance transformation. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Apply Reflection : Toggles reflection in the transformation. Apply Translation : Toggles translation in the transformation. Apply Rotation : Toggles rotation in the transformation. Reflection Plane : Specifies the REFLECTION PLANE object to use in a transformation. Rotation Axis Type : Specifies the rotation axis type in the transformation. If it is set to `Principal Axis, Principal Axis parameter setting is used.If it is set to Rotation Axis, parameters Rotation Axis From and Rotation Axis To are used for the axis definition.' Principal Axis : Specifies the principal axis used in instance rotation. Rotation Axis From : An XYZ triple defining the first point of the rotation axis. Rotation Axis To : An XYZ triple defining the second point of the rotation axis. Rotation Angle : Specifies the rotation angle. Full Circle : If set to On, the instances are placed uniformly about the instance rotation axis. Note that the Number of Copies has to be greater than two when this option is used. Translation Vector : Specifies the translation vector. Number of Copies : Specifies the number of transformed copies.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 281

CFX-Post Appendix

INSTANCE TRANSFORM
Description Named Object: Specifies an instance transformation that can consist of a rotation,a translation, a reflection and a number of copies of the original object to produce. Note that applying reflection duplicates the number of copies. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Apply Reflection : Toggles reflection in the transformation. Apply Translation : Toggles translation in the transformation. Apply Rotation : Toggles rotation in the transformation. Reflection Plane : Specifies the REFLECTION PLANE object to use in a transformation. Rotation Axis Type : Specifies the rotation axis type in the transformation. If it is set to `Principal Axis,Principal Axis parameter setting is used.If it is set to Rotation Axis, parameters Rotation Axis From and Rotation Axis To are used for the axis definition.' Principal Axis : Specifies the principal axis used in instance rotation. Rotation Axis From : An XYZ triple defining the first point of the rotation axis. Rotation Axis To : An XYZ triple defining the second point of the rotation axis. Rotation Angle : Specifies the rotation angle. Full Circle : If set to On, the instances are placed uniformly about the instance rotation axis. Note that the Number of Copies has to be greater than two when this option is used. Translation Vector : Specifies the translation vector. Number of Copies : Specifies the number of transformed copies.
Page 282

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

REFLECTION PLANE
Description Named Object: This is a sub-object used for the reflection plane definition in TRANSFORM object. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: XY Plane, YZ Plane, ZX Plane, Point and Normal, Three Points Option = YZ Plane Optional Parameters X : The X coordinate value for the location of this object. Option = ZX Plane Optional Parameters Y : The Y coordinate value for the location of this object. Option = XY Plane Optional Parameters Z : The Z coordinate value for the location of this object. Option = Point and Normal Optional Parameters
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 283

CFX-Post Appendix

Point : An XYZ triple which defines a point in space. Normal : An XYZ triple describing the normal vector. Option = Three Points Optional Parameters Point 1 : An XYZ triple defining the first point for this object. Point 2 : An XYZ triple defining the second point for this object. Point 3 : An XYZ triple defining the third point for this object.

CAMERA
Description Named Object: Defines a camera that can be used to specify the current view in the VIEWER object. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Option : A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Option Allowed Context Settings: Pivot Point and Quaternion, Pivot Point and Rotation Option = Pivot Point and Quaternion Optional Parameters Pivot Point : Defines the center of rotation (pivot point) for the camera. Rotation Quaternion : Defines the camera rotation quaternion.

Page 284

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Scale : Defines the relative scale of the camera view. With the default scale (1.0), the scene completely fills the viewer window. Pan : Defines the camera pan in screen (X, Y) coordinates, with positive X pointing right and positive Y pointing up. Option = Pivot Point and Rotation Optional Parameters Pivot Point : Defines the center of rotation (pivot point) for the camera. Rotation : Defines the camera rotation in terms of angles about X, Y and Z axis, respectively. X axis is pointing right, Y is pointing up and Z towards the user. Scale : Defines the relative scale of the camera view. With the default scale (1.0), the scene completely fills the viewer window. Pan : Defines the camera pan in screen (X, Y) coordinates, with positive X pointing right and positive Y pointing up.

LEGEND
Description Named Object: Creates a labelled colour bar to show to legend associated with the named plot. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Legend Plot : Name of the locator for which to provide information. Optional Parameters Legend X Justification : Specifies the horizontal justification of a text or overlay item. Legend Y Justification : Specifies the vertical justification of a text or overlay item. Legend Position : XY position of the legend.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 285

CFX-Post Appendix

Legend Size : Scale factor to apply to legend. Legend Ticks : Number of points to provide variable values next to the Legend bar. Legend Resolution : Number of colour subdivisions on the legend bar. Legend Shading : Controls interpolated shading of colour on the legend bar. Font : The font name for an item of text. Legend Aspect : Legend bar width control parameter Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Legend Format : Parameter to modify string format of values on legend.

TEXT
Description Named Object: A single piece of text. This text item can be attached to a point on screen (specified in two dimensions), or attached to a point in three dimensions, following that point through any viewer transformations. Font, size, colour, rotation and justification options are provided. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Text String : The contents of an item of text. Position Mode : Defines whether a text item is attached to twodimensional screen coordinate, or a three-dimensional spatial coordinate.
Page 286

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Optional Parameters Text Position : The location an item of text should be placed. Text Height : The height an item of text should be, proportional to the screen. Colour : A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Overlay Size : A factor by which to scale the size of a two-dimensional overlay. Font : The font name for an item of text. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Position Mode Allowed Context Settings: Two Coords, Three Coords Position Mode = Two Coords Optional Parameters X Justification : Specifies the horizontal justification of a text or overlay item. Y Justification : Specifies the vertical justification of a text or overlay item. Position Mode = Three Coords Optional Parameters Text Rotation : Counter-clockwise rotation, in degrees, to be applied to a text item.

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 287

CFX-Post Appendix

COORD FRAME
Description Named Object: Defines a coordinate frame which can be used for setting direction and axis specifications. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Reference Coord Frame : The Coordinate Frame in which the physical locations used to set this coordinate frame are described. Coord Frame Type : The orthonormal space used to define the coordinate frame. Origin X Coord : The X location of the coordinate frame origin. Origin Y Coord : The Y location of the coordinate frame origin. Origin Z Coord : The Z location of the coordinate frame origin. Axis 3 Point X Coord : The X location of the point in the Z axis of the coordinate frame. Axis 3 Point Y Coord : The Y location of the point in the Z axis of the coordinate frame. Axis 3 Point Z Coord : The Z location of the point in the Z axis of the coordinate frame. Plane 13 Point X Coord : The X location of the a point in the XZ plane of the coordinate frame. Plane 13 Point Y Coord : The Y location of the a point in the XZ plane of the coordinate frame. Plane 13 Point Z Coord : The Z location of the a point in the XZ plane of the coordinate frame. Visibility : Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer.

Page 288

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

CHART
Description Named Object: This object is used to create a chart and specify general chart parameters, including the CHART LINE objects that define the chart lines. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Chart Type : Specifies the kind of chart to create. Optional Parameters Chart Title : Specifies the title for the chart. Chart Font : The name of the font to use for this chart. Chart Text Colour : The colour of the chart title and X & Y Axis Labels. Chart Viewport Colour : The colour of the chart viewport including axes, tick marks, and axis numbering. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Chart Type Allowed Context Settings: XY Chart Type = XY Optional Parameters Chart Line List : A comma delimited list of names of CHART LINE objects that the user wishes to have displayed on the chart. Chart Legend : Specifies whether a legend should be displayed or not. Chart Legend Margin : Indicates a proportion of the screen space that should be used to display the Legend. The default value of 0.2 indicates that 20% of the chart, at the right side of the window, should be allocated to the Legend.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 289

CFX-Post Appendix

Chart Axes : Indicates whether the X=0 or Y=0 lines should be displayed on the chart. Neither, either or both may be displayed. Chart X Axis Label : The label to use for the X-Axis. Chart Y Axis Label : The label to use for the Y-Axis. Range Selection : Indicates whether the Min/Max X and Y values shown on the chart will be automatically or manually selected. Max X : If the Range Selection parameter is set to `Manual,this parameter will indicate the maximum X value to display.' Min X : If the Range Selection parameter is set to `Manual,this parameter will indicate the minimum X value to display.' Max Y : If the Range Selection parameter is set to `Manual,this parameter will indicate the maximum Y value to display.' Min Y : If the Range Selection parameter is set to `Manual,this parameter will indicate the minimum Y value to display.'

CHART LINE
Description Named Object: This object defines the variable, line style, symbol style, and colours to use for a chart line. Allowed Parameters Optional Parameters Line Name : The name of this chart line. This string will be used as the label in the Legend if one is displayed. Location : A locator name. Chart X Variable : Specifies the name of the X-Axis variable to chart. The default value of `Chart Count indicates that the X-Axis will be a locator point counter.' Chart Y Variable : Specifies the name of the Y-Axis variable to chart.

Page 290

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Display Chart Line : Indicates whether or not to display a line connecting the data points. Chart Line Style : Specifies the line style to use if the Chart Line Toggle is True. Chart Line Colour : Specifies the colour of the line. The Default value of Auto will cause the Engine to automatically pick a colour different from any colour already used. Display Chart Symbol : Indicates whether or not to display a symbol at each data point on the chart. Chart Symbol Style : Specifies the symbol style to use if the Chart Symbol Toggle is True. Chart Symbol Colour : Specifies the colour of the symbol. The Default value of Auto will cause the Engine to automatically pick a colour different from any colour already used.

CALCULATOR
Description Singleton Object: This singleton is used by the calculate action to define the function and arguments to be evaluated, and store the Result. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters Function : The context controlling parameter for the CALCULATOR object, which defines the name of the function to be evaluated. Location : A locator name. Optional Parameters Verbose : Controls if the result of a calculation is written to the screen. Internal Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 291

CFX-Post Appendix

Result : The internal parameter for the CALCULATOR and EXPRESSION EVALUATOR object used to store the results of a function evaluation. Result Units : The internal parameter for the CALCULATOR and EXPRESSION EVALUATOR object used to store the units of the results of a function evaluation. Context Sensitive Settings Context Controlling Parameter: Function Allowed Context Settings: area, areaAve, areaInt, ave, count, force, forceNorm, length, lengthAve, lengthInt, massFlow, massFlowAve, massFlowInt, maxVal, minVal, probe, sum, torque, volume, volumeAve, volumeInt Function = massFlow Optional Parameters Fluid : The fluid specification for multiphase quantitative calculations. Function = massFlowAve Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression. Optional Parameters Fluid : The fluid specification for multiphase quantitative calculations. Function = area Optional Parameters Axis : The axis specification for directional quantitative calculations. Function = areaAve Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression.

Page 292

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Function = areaInt Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression. Optional Parameters Axis : The axis specification for directional quantitative calculations. Function = ave Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression. Function = sum Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression. Function = minVal Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression. Function = maxVal Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression. Function = probe Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression. Function = force Essential Parameters Axis : The axis specification for directional quantitative calculations. Optional Parameters
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 293

CFX-Post Appendix

Fluid : The fluid specification for multiphase quantitative calculations. Function = forceNorm Optional Parameters Fluid : The fluid specification for multiphase quantitative calculations. Function = torque Essential Parameters Axis : The axis specification for directional quantitative calculations. Optional Parameters Fluid : The fluid specification for multiphase quantitative calculations. Function = lengthInt Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression. Function = lengthAve Essential Parameters Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression.

MESH CALCULATOR
Description Singleton Object: This singleton is used by the mesh calculate action to define the function to be evaluated, and store the max and min Results. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters

Page 294

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Mesh Function : The context controlling parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object, which defines the name of the function to be evaluated. Internal Parameters Max Result : The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the max result of evaluation. Min Result : The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the min result of evaluation. Result Units : The internal parameter for the CALCULATOR and EXPRESSION EVALUATOR object used to store the units of the results of a function evaluation. Number of Nodes : The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of nodes. Number of Elements : The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of elements. Number of Tetrahedra : The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of tetrahedra. Number of Wedges : The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of wedges. Number of Pyramids : The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of pyramids. Number of Hexahedra : The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of hexahedra.

EXPRESSION EVALUATOR
Description Singleton Object: This singleton evaluates the specified Expression and stores the Result. Allowed Parameters Essential Parameters
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Objects

Page 295

CFX-Post Appendix

Evaluated Expression : A CFX Expression Language expression for usage in EXPRESSION EVALUATOR. Internal Parameters Result : The internal parameter for the CALCULATOR and EXPRESSION EVALUATOR object used to store the results of a function evaluation. Result Units : The internal parameter for the CALCULATOR and EXPRESSION EVALUATOR object used to store the units of the results of a function evaluation.

Page 296

CCL Objects

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

CCL Parameters Absolute Tolerance

Description: Length to use as a maximum step tolerance Parameter Type: Real

Animate Camera
Description: Indicates whether to animate the camera (flythrough)along with the other objects, or leave the camera at the current position. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: On

Animation Filename
Description: The name of the file to save this animation to. Parameter Type: String

Animation Frame Rate

Description: The Frame Rate at which to generate the Animation MPEG. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: 24, 25, 30, 50, 60 Default Value: 24

Animation Hardcopy Filename

Description: The path of the file to save a hardcopy to. Parameter Type: String

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 297

CFX-Post Appendix

Animation Name
Description: The name of this animation. Parameter Type: String

Apply Instancing Transform

Description: Toggles the instancing transformation for this graphics object in the viewer. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: On

Apply Reflection
Description: Toggles reflection in the transformation. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: false

Apply Rotation
Description: Toggles rotation in the transformation. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: true

Apply Translation
Description: Toggles translation in the transformation. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: false

Axis
Description: The axis specification for directional quantitative calculations.
Page 298

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: String

Axis 3 Point X Coord

Description: The X location of the point in the Z axis of the coordinate frame. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0

Axis 3 Point Y Coord

Description: The Y location of the point in the Z axis of the coordinate frame. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0

Axis 3 Point Z Coord

Description: The Z location of the point in the Z axis of the coordinate frame. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1

Axis Visibility
Description: Toggles the axis visibility in the viewer. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: true

Background Colour
Description: Defines the R, G and B values for the viewer background colour. Parameter Type: Real List
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 299

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: 0, 0, 0

Base Units
Description: The base units of a variable. Parameter Type: String

Border Visibility
Description: Toggles the viewport border visibility in the viewer. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: false

Bound Radius
Description: Radius of Circular Plane Bound. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.5

Boundary List
Description: A list of boundary objects Parameter Type: String List

Boundary Type
Description: Internal parameter tells the type of the boundary. Parameter Type: String

Boundary Values
Description: Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for this variable (Conservative or Hybrid). Parameter Type: String
Page 300

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Allowed Values: Conservative, Hybrid Default Value: Conservative

Camera Mode
Description: Defines the current viewer camera mode. It can be either Standard (specified by Standard View parameter) or User Specified, in which case a CAMERA object has to be defined and specified in User Camera parameter. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Standard, User Specified Default Value: Standard

Chart Axes
Description: Indicates whether the X=0 or Y=0 lines should be displayed on the chart. Neither, either or both may be displayed. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, X Only, Y Only, Both Default Value: Both

Chart Font
Description: The name of the font to use for this chart. Parameter Type: String Default Value: Roman

Chart Legend
Description: Specifies whether a legend should be displayed or not. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: False
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 301

CFX-Post Appendix

Chart Legend Margin

Description: Indicates a proportion of the screen space that should be used to display the Legend. The default value of 0.2 indicates that 20% of the chart, at the right side of the window, should be allocated to the Legend. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.2

Chart Line Colour

Description: Specifies the colour of the line. The Default value of Auto will cause the Engine to automatically pick a colour different from any colour already used. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Auto, Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Aquamarine, Pink, Wheat, Grey, Brown, Blue, Blueviolet, Cyan, Turquoise, Magenta, Salmon, White Default Value: Auto

Chart Line List

Description: A comma delimited list of names of CHART LINE objects that the user wishes to have displayed on the chart. Parameter Type: String

Chart Line Style

Description: Specifies the line style to use if the Chart Line Toggle is True. Parameter Type: String Default Value: 1

Page 302

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Chart Symbol Colour

Description: Specifies the colour of the symbol. The Default value of Auto will cause the Engine to automatically pick a colour different from any colour already used. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Auto, Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Aquamarine, Pink, Wheat, Grey, Brown, Blue, Blueviolet, Cyan, Turquoise, Magenta, Salmon, White Default Value: Auto

Chart Symbol Style

Description: Specifies the symbol style to use if the Chart Symbol Toggle is True. Parameter Type: String Default Value: 1

Chart Text Colour

Description: The colour of the chart title and X & Y Axis Labels. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Aquamarine, Pink, Wheat, Grey, Brown, Blue, Blueviolet, Cyan, Turquoise, Magenta, Salmon, White Default Value: White

Chart Title
Description: Specifies the title for the chart. Parameter Type: String Default Value: Title

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 303

CFX-Post Appendix

Chart Type
Description: Specifies the kind of chart to create. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: XY Default Value: XY

Chart Viewport Colour

Description: The colour of the chart viewport including axes, tick marks, and axis numbering. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Aquamarine, Pink, Wheat, Grey, Brown, Blue, Blueviolet, Cyan, Turquoise, Magenta, Salmon, White Default Value: Yellow

Chart X Axis Label

Description: The label to use for the X-Axis. Parameter Type: String Default Value: X Axis

Chart X Variable
Description: Specifies the name of the X-Axis variable to chart. The default value of `Chart Count indicates that the X-Axis will be a locator point counter.' Parameter Type: String Default Value: Chart Count

Chart Y Axis Label

Description: The label to use for the Y-Axis.
Page 304

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: String Default Value: Y Axis

Chart Y Variable
Description: Specifies the name of the Y-Axis variable to chart. Parameter Type: String

Clip Plane
Description: Defines the CLIP PLANE object that is used for scene clipping. Parameter Type: String

Clip Scene
Description: Toggles the scene clipping plane in the viewer. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: false

Colour
Description: A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the faces of an object by constant colour. Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: 1.0, 1.0, 1.0

Colour Mode
Description: Sets the mode used to colour the object. If set equal to "Constant" then the "Colour" parameter is used to determine the plot colour. If set equal to "Variable", then the "Colour Variable" parameter is used. Parameter Type: String
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 305

CFX-Post Appendix

Allowed Values: Use Plot Variable, Constant, Variable, Time, Unique Default Value: Constant

Colour Variable
Description: The name of the variable to be used in colouring the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Parameter Type: String

Colour Variable Boundary Values

Description: Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for colour variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Conservative, Hybrid Default Value: Hybrid

Component Bounds Flag

Parameter Type: String

Component Clip Factors

Parameter Type: Real List

Component Index
Description: Specifies vector component to be used for the variable. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: 1, 2, 3 Default Value: 1

Page 306

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Component Long Names

Parameter Type: String List

Component Lower Bounds

Parameter Type: Real List

Component MMS Names

Parameter Type: String List

Component Short Names

Parameter Type: String List

Component Upper Bounds

Parameter Type: Real List

Constant Contour Colour

Description: If set to On, then the "Line Colour" parameter is used to determine the contour colour. Otherwise, the contour is coloured by the contour variable. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Contour Range
Description: Sets the method used to calculate a contour plot."Global" uses the range of variable values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the specified list of objects. "User Specified" uses Min and Max parameter value. "Value List" plots contours on the values specified in Value List parameter. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Global, Local, User Specified, Value List
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 307

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: Global

Coord Frame Type

Description: The orthonormal space used to define the coordinate frame. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Cartesian Default Value: Cartesian

Cross Periodics
Description: If true allows a streamline to cross a periodic boundary Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Yes

Culling Mode
Description: Controls the face culling of this object in the viewer. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: No Culling, Back Faces, Front Faces Default Value: No Culling

Current File Type

Description: The type of the results file to be read into the postprocessor. This is an internal parameter. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: CFX5, CFX4

Page 308

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Current Frame
Description: The current frame that is displayed or calculated. This is useful to determine where in the animation you are when stepping through the frames. This is an internal parameter for status display purposes only. Parameter Type: Integer

Current Results File

Description: The name of the results file to be read into the postprocessor. Parameter Type: String

Current Results File Version

Description: The version of the current results file. Parameter Type: Integer

Current Timestep
Description: The timestep to be used when reading a transient results file. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: -1

Current Timevalue
Description: The time value to be used when reading a transient results file. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 309

CFX-Post Appendix

Custom Units Setting

Description: This is a comma delimited list of Quantities and their selected units for the Custom Units Setting. The list will contain both Quantities and the units: e.g. Acceleration, m s^-2, Angle, radian, ... Parameter Type: String List

Default Vulnerability
Description: Default vulnerability for non-permanent solver data. Parameter Type: Integer

Direction
Description: The direction specification for vector coord frame projection. Parameter Type: String

Direction 1 Bound
Description: Length of Rectangular Plane Bound. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1.0

Direction 1 Orientation
Description: Orientation of Rectangular Plane Bound length. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0 [degree]

Direction 1 Points
Description: Number of Sample points in direction 1. Parameter Type: Integer
Page 310

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: 10

Direction 2 Bound
Description: Width of Rectangular Plane Bound. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1.0

Direction 2 Points
Description: Number of Sample points in direction 2. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 10

Display Chart Line

Description: Indicates whether or not to display a line connecting the data points. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: True

Display Chart Symbol

Description: Indicates whether or not to display a symbol at each data point on the chart. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: False

Domain List
Description: The list of domains over which to define this object. Parameter Type: String List Default Value: All Domains
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 311

CFX-Post Appendix

Draw Contours
Description: Enables/disables drawing of the contour lines. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: On

Draw Faces
Description: Toggles the visibility filled faces for this graphics objectin the viewer. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: On

Draw Lines
Description: Toggles the visibility of lines around each face of this graphics object. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Draw Streams
Description: If false do not draw streams, but allow drawing of symbols Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Yes

Draw Symbols
Description: Draw symbols on the streams at specified times Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: No

Page 312

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Edge Angle
Description: The angle between two faces used to limit visible edges in a wireframe. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 30 [degree]

Evaluated Expression
Description: A CFX Expression Language expression for usage in EXPRESSION EVALUATOR. Parameter Type: String

Export File
Description: The filename to which the exported data will be written. Parameter Type: String Default Value: export.dat

Expression
Description: A CFX Expression Language expression. Parameter Type: String

Flip Normal
Description: If this parameter is set to true, the normal of the clip plane will be flipped, effectively inverting the clipping region. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: false

Fluid
Description: The fluid specification for multiphase quantitative calculations.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 313

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: String

Font
Description: The font name for an item of text. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Serif, Sans Serif Default Value: Sans Serif

Frame Increment
Description: The number of frames to increment the frame counter by when incrementing to go to the next frame. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 1

Fringe Fill
Description: If set to On, the space between contours in a contour plot is filled with fringe bands. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Full Circle
Description: If set to On, the instances are placed uniformly about the instance rotation axis. Note that the Number of Copies has to be greater than two when this option is used. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: On

Page 314

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Function
Description: The context controlling parameter for the CALCULATOR object, which defines the name of the function to be evaluated. Parameter Type: String

General Availability
Parameter Type: String List Default Value: No

Grid Tolerance
Description: Fraction of local grid size to use as a maximum step tolerance Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.01

Hardcopy Filename
Description: Sets the file name for the output from "print". Parameter Type: String Default Value: cfxOutput

Hardcopy Format
Description: Sets the format of hardcopy output from "print". Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: ps, eps, jpg, ppm, bmp, png, vrml Default Value: ps

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 315

CFX-Post Appendix

Hardcopy Tolerance
Description: A non-dimensional tolerance used in face-sorting when generating hardcopy output. Smaller values will result in faster printing times, but may cause defects in the resulting output. Parameter Type: String Default Value: 0.001

Has Hybrid Values

Description: Internal parameter specifying whether a variable can load Hybrid Values on boundary nodes. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Yes

HybridMax
Description: The global hybrid maximum value from this variable as read from the RES file. Parameter Type: Real

HybridMin
Description: The global hybrid minimum value from this variable as read from the RES file. Parameter Type: Real

Image Scale
Description: Scales the size of bitmap images to a fraction (in percent) of the current viewer window size. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 100

Page 316

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Include Header
Description: Indicates whether a pre-defined header is appended to the top of the export file, using ` Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: True

Inclusive
Description: If this parameter set to true, then the volume for above or below intersection includes intersections . Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: false

Input File
Description: The name of the file to be read that contains the definition of one or more polylines and associated path variables. Parameter Type: String Default Value: data.txt

Instancing Transform
Description: Defines the TRANSFORM object that is used for the object instancing. Parameter Type: String Default Value: Default Transform

Interface Type
Description: Matches the solver CCL parameter, saying what kind of GGI interface this is Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Fluid Fluid, Fluid Solid, Solid Solid, Periodic
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 317

CFX-Post Appendix

Intermediate File Format

Description: The format in which to save intermediate files when generating animation MPEGs. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: jpg, ppm Default Value: jpg

Invert Plane Bound

Description: Reverses the plane bounds by selecting region outside plane bound. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Isovolume Intersection Mode

Description: A parameter used to define the context setting for isovolume object. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: At Value, Below Value, Above Value, Between Values Default Value: At Value

JPEG Image Quality

Description: The quality factor for jpeg image output. Higher values results in clearer, but larger, files. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 80

Page 318

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Keep Intermediate Files

Description: Boolean indicating whether or not CFX-Post should delete the intermediate files after the MPEG generation is complete. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Keyframe Filename
Description: A string containing the name of the state file associated with this keyframe. Parameter Type: String

Keyframe List
Description: An ordered list of keyframe names to be used for this animation. Parameter Type: String List

Keyframe Name
Description: A string containing the name of the keyframe to display to the user. Parameter Type: String

Legend Aspect
Description: Legend bar width control parameter Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.06

Legend Format
Description: Parameter to modify string format of values on legend. Parameter Type: String
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 319

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: %9.6f

Legend Plot
Description: Name of the locator for which to provide information. Parameter Type: String

Legend Position
Description: XY position of the legend. Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: 0.02, 0.15

Legend Resolution
Description: Number of colour subdivisions on the legend bar. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 256

Legend Shading
Description: Controls interpolated shading of colour on the legend bar. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Smooth, Flat Default Value: Smooth

Legend Size
Description: Scale factor to apply to legend. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.75

Page 320

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Legend Ticks
Description: Number of points to provide variable values next to the Legend bar. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 5

Legend X Justification
Description: Specifies the horizontal justification of a text or overlay item. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, Center, Left, Right Default Value: Left

Legend Y Justification
Description: Specifies the vertical justification of a text or overlay item. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, Center, Top, Bottom Default Value: Center

Light Angle
Description: Defines the viewer light angles in degrees. The first angle goes from left (0) to right (180), and the second goes from up (0) to down (180). Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: 110, 110

Lighting
Description: Toggles the lighting of this graphics object in the viewer.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 321

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: true

Line Colour
Description: A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used for colouring the lines on a graphics object. Parameter Type: String List Default Value: 1.0, 1.0, 1.0

Line Name
Description: The name of this chart line. This string will be used as the label in the Legend if one is displayed. Parameter Type: String Default Value: New Line

Line Samples
Description: Number of points in the sample line. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 10

Line Type
Description: Indicates if the line is a cut or sample line. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Cut, Sample Default Value: Sample

Page 322

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Line Width
Description: Controls the width (in pixels) of lines drawn for this graphics object. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 1

Load Data
Description: This parameter indicates whether to load the results file or not if a DATA READER object exists in the STATE File for a READSTATE action. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: True

Location
Description: A locator name. Parameter Type: String

Location List
Description: A comma delimited list of locator names. Parameter Type: String List

Long Name
Parameter Type: String

Looping
Description: Indicates the type of looping to perform for the animation. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Bounce, Loop
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 323

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: Loop

Looping Cycles
Description: Indicates the number of cycles that the Animation loop should complete before stopping automatically. A value of -1 will repeat the cycles forever. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 1

MMS Name
Parameter Type: String

MPEG Scale
Description: The amount to scale the viewer image for the Animation MPEG output. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 100

Max
Description: The maximum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range. Parameter Type: Real

Max Result
Description: The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the max result of evaluation. Parameter Type: String

Page 324

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Max X
Description: If the Range Selection parameter is set to `Manual,this parameter will indicate the maximum X value to display.' Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1.0

Max Y
Description: If the Range Selection parameter is set to `Manual,this parameter will indicate the maximum Y value to display.' Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1.0

Member List
Description: A list of objects included in the group. Parameter Type: String List

Mesh Function
Description: The context controlling parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object, which defines the name of the function to be evaluated. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Maximum Face Angle, Minimum Face Angle, Edge Length Ratio, Connectivity Number, Element Volume Ratio, Mesh Statistics Default Value: Maximum Face Angle

Min
Description: The minimum value of a variable in the colourmap when using a "User Specified" range.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 325

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: Real

Min Result
Description: The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the min result of evaluation. Parameter Type: String

Min X
Description: If the Range Selection parameter is set to `Manual,this parameter will indicate the minimum X value to display.' Parameter Type: Real Default Value: -1.0

Min Y
Description: If the Range Selection parameter is set to `Manual,this parameter will indicate the minimum Y value to display,this parameter will indicate the minimum Y value to display.' Parameter Type: Real Default Value: -1.0

Node Number
Description: the node number which the point plot will be drawn Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 0

Normal
Description: An XYZ triple describing the normal vector. Parameter Type: String List Default Value: 1.0,0.0,0.0
Page 326

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Normalized
Description: If set On, all vectors are plotted with the same length (show direction only). Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Null Token
Description: The string that should be used in the export file if no data exists for a variable at a node. Parameter Type: String Default Value: <null

Number Of Frames
Description: The number of frames in the animation to insert between this keyframe and the next. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 10

Number of Contours
Description: Specifies number of contour lines in a contour plot. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 10

Number of Copies
Description: Specifies the number of transformed copies. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 1

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 327

CFX-Post Appendix

Number of Elements
Description: The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of elements. Parameter Type: String

Number of Hexahedra
Description: The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of hexahedra. Parameter Type: String

Number of Nodes
Description: The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of nodes. Parameter Type: String

Number of Pyramids
Description: The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of pyramids. Parameter Type: String

Number of Samples
Description: The number of random samples to be taken in the plot. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 10

Number of Sides
Description: The number of sides of a round 'tube' Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 4
Page 328

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Number of Tetrahedra
Description: The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of tetrahedra. Parameter Type: String

Number of Wedges
Description: The internal parameter for the MESH CALCULATOR object used to store the number of wedges. Parameter Type: String

Opposite Boundary List

Description: The boundaries that form the other side of a periodic link Parameter Type: String List

Option
Description: A generic parameter used to define the context setting for a variety of objects. Parameter Type: String

Origin X Coord
Description: The X location of the coordinate frame origin. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0

Origin Y Coord
Description: The Y location of the coordinate frame origin. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 329

CFX-Post Appendix

Origin Z Coord
Description: The Z location of the coordinate frame origin. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0

Output to Jobfile
Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: No

Output to Postprocessor
Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: No

Overlay Size
Description: A factor by which to scale the size of a two-dimensional overlay. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1

Overwrite
Description: Indicates whether, if the specified filename exists, the file should be overwritten with the new data. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: False

Pan
Description: Defines the camera pan in screen (X, Y) coordinates, with positive X pointing right and positive Y pointing up.
Page 330

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: 0.0, 0.0

Paper Orientation
Description: Sets the rotation of the image on the printed page. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Landscape, Portrait Default Value: Landscape

Paper Size
Description: Scales hardcopy output to the specified paper size. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Letter, A4 Default Value: Letter

Periodicity Type
Description: Says whether the boundary is periodic in rotation or translation Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Rotation,Translation

Physical Availability
Parameter Type: String List Default Value: No

Pivot Point
Description: Defines the center of rotation (pivot point) for the camera. Parameter Type: String List
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 331

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: 0.0, 0.0, 0.0

Plane 13 Point X Coord

Description: The X location of the a point in the XZ plane of the coordinate frame. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1

Plane 13 Point Y Coord

Description: The Y location of the a point in the XZ plane of the coordinate frame. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0

Plane 13 Point Z Coord

Description: The Z location of the a point in the XZ plane of the coordinate frame. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0

Plane Bound
Description: Defines plane bounding (Circular, Rectangular, None). Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, Circular, Rectangular Default Value: None

Plane Type
Description: Indicates if the plane is a slice or sample plane.
Page 332

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Slice, Sample Default Value: Slice

Playback Status
Description: This parameter indicates whether the animation is stopped or playing forward or backward. This is an internal parameter for status display purposes only. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Stopped, Forward, Backward, Paused Default Value: Stopped

Point
Description: An XYZ triple which defines a point in space. Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: 0.0, 0.0, 0.0

Point 1
Description: An XYZ triple defining the first point for this object. Parameter Type: String List Default Value: 0.0, 0.0, 0.0

Point 2
Description: An XYZ triple defining the second point for this object. Parameter Type: String List Default Value: 1.0, 0.0, 0.0

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 333

CFX-Post Appendix

Point 3
Description: An XYZ triple defining the third point for this object. Parameter Type: String List Default Value: 0.0, 1.0, 0.0

Point Symbol
Description: Name of point symbol (non-directional) to be used for plot. Parameter Type: String Default Value: Crosshair

Position Mode
Description: Defines whether a text item is attached to twodimensional screen coordinate, or a three-dimensional spatial coordinate. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Two Coords, Three Coords Default Value: Two Coords

Precision
Description: Indicates the number of decimal points of precision to display the exported data to. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 8

Preferred Units System

Description: This specifies the Units System to use. Parameter Type: String
Page 334

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: SI

Principal Axis
Description: Specifies the principal axis used in instance rotation. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: X, Y, Z Default Value: Z

Print Line Width

Description: The width of lines in hardcopy output. Increasing this value may give better results on high-resolution printers. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 1

Print Quality
Description: Controls quality vs. speed of hardcopy output. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Draft, Medium, High Default Value: High

Projection
Description: Defines the current projection mode in the viewer. It can be either Perspective or Orthographic. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Perspective, Orthographic Default Value: Perspective

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 335

CFX-Post Appendix

Projection Type
Description: The vector projection type to be used in creating this plot. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, Coord Frame, Normal, Tangential Default Value: None

Quantity
Parameter Type: String

Quantity Type
Description: Specifies the Quantity Type of the variable. Parameter Type: String

Radius
Description: Radius distance for sphere volume. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1.0

Random Seed
Description: The seed to be used in the sampling of points on the plot. Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 1

Range
Description: Sets the method used to calculate the extents of the colour map on an object. "Global" uses the range of values in the problem domain. "Local" uses the range of values on the current object.
Page 336

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Global, Local, User Specified Default Value: Global

Range Selection
Description: Indicates whether the Min/Max X and Y values shown on the chart will be automatically or manually selected. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Automatic, Manual Default Value: Automatic

Read State Mode

Description: This parameter indicates whether the current system state information should be overwritten or appended to. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Overwrite, Append Default Value: Overwrite

Recipe
Description: Contains instructions on how to build a value list for the variable. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Standard, Vector Component, Expression Default Value: Standard

Reduction Factor
Description: Reduces the number of nodes of a locator to use Parameter Type: Real
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 337

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: 1.0

Reference Coord Frame

Description: The Coordinate Frame in which the physical locations used to set this coordinate frame are described. Parameter Type: String Default Value: Coord 0

Reflection Plane
Description: Specifies the REFLECTION PLANE object to use in a transformation. Parameter Type: String

Result
Description: The internal parameter for the CALCULATOR and EXPRESSION EVALUATOR object used to store the results of a function evaluation. Parameter Type: String

Result Units
Description: The internal parameter for the CALCULATOR and EXPRESSION EVALUATOR object used to store the units of the results of a function evaluation. Parameter Type: String

Ribbon Width
Description: The initial width of stream ribbons Parameter Type: Real

Page 338

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Rotation
Description: Defines the camera rotation in terms of angles about X, Y and Z axis, respectively. X axis is pointing right, Y is pointing up and Z towards the user. Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: -90, 0, 0

Rotation Angle
Description: Specifies the rotation angle. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0 [degree]

Rotation Axis From

Description: An XYZ triple defining the first point of the rotation axis. Parameter Type: String List Default Value: 0.0, 0.0, 0.0

Rotation Axis To
Description: An XYZ triple defining the second point of the rotation axis. Parameter Type: String List Default Value: 1.0, 0.0, 0.0

Rotation Axis Type

Description: Specifies the rotation axis type in the transformation. If it is set to `Principal Axis,Principal Axis parameter setting is used. If it is set to Rotation Axis,parameters Rotation Axis From and Rotation Axis To are used for the axis definition.' Parameter Type: String
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 339

CFX-Post Appendix

Allowed Values: Principal Axis, Rotation Axis Default Value: Principal Axis

Rotation Quaternion
Description: Defines the camera rotation quaternion. Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: -0.707107, 0, 0, 0.707107

Save Hardcopy
Description: Boolean indicating whether to save the current animation to a file, as it progresses. A filename needs to be specified. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Save State Mode

Description: This parameter indicates whether the state file should be overwritten if it exists. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, Overwrite Default Value: None

Save State Objects

Description: A list of objects to save to the state file. If this list is empty, then all user created objects will be saved. Parameter Type: String List

Scale
Description: Defines the relative scale of the camera view. With the default scale (1.0), the scene completely fills the viewer window.
Page 340

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 1.0

Screen Capture
Description: Enables the screen capture mode for producing image output. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Separator
Description: Indicates the string to use between each variable. The string must be delimited by quotation marks. Parameter Type: String Default Value: " "

Session Filename
Description: The name of the session file to which session data will be saved. Parameter Type: String Default Value: session.cse

Show Numbers
Description: Toggles contour numbering. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: On

Slice Plane
Description: Specifies the name of the PLANE object to use for the clip plane definition.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 341

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: String

Solver Name
Description: The name of this object inside the RES file. Parameter Type: String

Specular Lighting
Description: Toggles the specular lighting of this object in the viewer. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Standard View
Description: Defines one of the standard views in the viewer (Note that Camera Mode has to be set to Standard for this parameter to have effect). Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: +X, +Y, +Z, -X, -Y, -Z, Isometric Default Value: +Y

State Filename
Description: The name of the state file to which state data will be saved. Parameter Type: String Default Value: state.cst

Status
Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: P,D,DR,M
Page 342

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Stream Ribbon Initial Direction

Description: Defines the initial plane of a stream ribbon Parameter Type: Direction Default Value: 0.0,0.0,1.0

Streamline Direction
Description: The direction in which streams are to be calculated Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Forward, Backward, Forward and Backward Default Value: Forward

Streamline Maximum Periods

Description: Limits the number of times a streamline may cross a periodic boundary Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 20

Streamline Maximum Segments

Description: Stops streamline calculation when number of segments exceeds this Parameter Type: Integer Default Value: 10000

Streamline Maximum Time

Description: Stops streamline calculation when particle age exceeds this Parameter Type: Real

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 343

CFX-Post Appendix

Streamline Solver Type

Description: The solver to use to calculate the streamlines Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Euler, RungeKutta2, RungeKutta4 Default Value: RungeKutta2

Surface Drawing
Description: Sets the algorithm used to shade the faces for this graphics object. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, Flat Shading, Smooth Shading Default Value: Smooth Shading

Surface Sampling
Description: If set On, results are displayed at a subset of points in the plot. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Symbol
Description: Name of symbol to be used for the plot. Parameter Type: String Default Value: Line Arrow

Symbol Size
Description: A scaling factor for all symbols in the plot. Parameter Type: Real
Page 344

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: 1.0

Symbol Start Time

Description: The particle age at which to draw the first symbol Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

Symbol Stop Time

Description: Draw no symbols with particle age lower than this Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

Symbol Time Interval

Description: Draw symbols at regular times separated by this value Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

Symbol Type
Description: The category a symbol falls under. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Arrow2D, Arrow3D, Crosshair, Octahedron, Line Arrow, Arrowhead Default Value: Line Arrow

Temporary Directory
Description: The path to a temporary working directory which CFXPost can use for placing temporary files. This directory does not have to exist between runs of CFX-Post, and the contents will be deleted when Post shuts down.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 345

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: String

Tensor Type
Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: SCALAR,VECTOR,SYMTEN2 Default Value: SCALAR

Text Colour
Description: A list of three numbers between 0 and 1, which represent the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values to be used when colouring the text. Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: 1.0, 1.0, 1.0

Text Height
Description: The height an item of text should be, proportional to the screen. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.02

Text Position
Description: The location an item of text should be placed. Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: 0, 0.96, 0

Text Rotation
Description: Counter-clockwise rotation, in degrees, to be applied to a text item. Parameter Type: Real
Page 346

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: 0

Text String
Description: The contents of an item of text. Parameter Type: String Default Value: Text

Timestep Interpolation Method

Description: Indicates what timestep information to interpolate if timesteps are to be animated. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Timestep, TimeValue, Sequential Default Value: Timestep

Tolerance Mode
Description: whether Grid Tolerance or Absolute Tolerance are used Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Grid Relative, Absolute Default Value: Grid Relative

Translation Vector
Description: Specifies the translation vector. Parameter Type: Real List Default Value: 0.0, 0.0, 0.0

Transparency
Description: Set between 0.0 (fully opaque) and 1.0 (fully transparent) to control the transparency of this graphics object in the viewer.
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 347

CFX-Post Appendix

Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

Tube Diameter
Description: The initial width of stream tubes Parameter Type: Real

Under Relaxation Factor

Parameter Type: Real

Update Units to Preferred

Description: This logical indicates whether all displayed units should always be updated to display the preferred units. If this is false',quantities will be converted to preferred types.' Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: false

User Camera
Description: Defines the CAMERA object that is used to set up the camera view in the viewer (Note that Camera Mode has to be set to User Specified for this parameter to have effect). Parameter Type: String

User Level
Description: Specifies the user level of the variable. Parameter Type: Integer Allowed Values: 1, 2, 3 Default Value: 1

Page 348

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

User Units
Description: Specifies the preferred units to display this variable in if different from the default units setting. To use the default units, this parameter must be empty (blank). Parameter Type: String

Value
Description: The value of the variable at which the isosurface is to be plotted. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

Value 1
Description: The value of the variable at which the isovolume is to be plotted. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

Value 2
Description: The value of the variable at which the isovolume is to be plotted it is used when the isovolume mode is between values. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

Value List
Description: Specifies a list of variable values for a contour plot. In order for this list to be used, Contour Range has to be set to "Value List". Parameter Type: Real List
CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 349

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: 0.0, 1.0

VarMax
Description: The global maximum value from this variable as read from the RES file. Parameter Type: Real

VarMin
Description: The global minimum value from this variable as read from the RES file. Parameter Type: Real

Variable
Description: The name of the variable used to create the object. Should be set equal to the name of a currently defined VARIABLE object. Parameter Type: String

Variable Boundary Values

Description: Sets the type of boundary values to be presented for variables in this object (Conservative or Hybrid). Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Conservative, Hybrid Default Value: Hybrid

Variable Class
Description: Solver variable class Parameter Type: String

Page 350

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Variable Description
Parameter Type: String Default Value: Long Name

Variable Dimensions
Description: The dimensions of the variable as read from the results file. Parameter Type: Real List

Variable List
Description: A comma delimited list of variables whose data is to be exported. Parameter Type: String List Default Value: X, Y, Z

Variable Type
Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Unspecified, Volumetric, Specific Default Value: Unspecified

Vector Brackets
Description: Indicates the kind of brackets to use around vector data when displayed as components. Any two character combination is valid, where the first character will be used as the open-bracket, and the second as the close-bracket. If "-" is specified (no quotes), no brackets will be displayed. Parameter Type: String Default Value: ()

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 351

CFX-Post Appendix

Vector Display
Description: Indicates the way that vector variables are to be displayed. Choices are: Components | Scalar. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Components, Scalar Default Value: Components

Vector Variable
Description: The vector variable to be used in creating this plot. Parameter Type: String Default Value: Velocity

Verbose
Description: Controls if the result of a calculation is written to the screen. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Visibility
Description: Toggles the visibility of this graphics object in the viewer. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: true

Volume Intersection Mode

Description: A parameter used to define the context setting for volume object. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: Intersection, Below Intersection, Above Intersection
Page 352

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post Appendix

Default Value: Intersection

White Background
Description: Toggles if hardcopy output is produced on a white or black background. Parameter Type: Logical Default Value: Off

Write Session Mode

Description: This parameter indicates whether the session file should be overwritten or appended to if it exists. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, Overwrite, Append Default Value: None

X
Description: The X coordinate value for the location of this object. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

X Justification
Description: Specifies the horizontal justification of a text or overlay item. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, Center, Left, Right Default Value: Center

CFX-5.5.1

CCL Parameters

Page 353

CFX-Post Appendix

Y
Description: The Y coordinate value for the location of this object. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

Y Justification
Description: Specifies the vertical justification of a text or overlay item. Parameter Type: String Allowed Values: None, Center, Top, Bottom Default Value: None

Z
Description: The Z coordinate value for the location of this object. Parameter Type: Real Default Value: 0.0

Page 354

CCL Parameters

CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post

Index
Master Index

2-CFX-Post

A
Animation 141 Editor 142 control buttons 145 Options panel 146 appearance of the GUI 31 Append, when loading State files 17 area function 129, 176, 203 areaAve function 130, 176, 204 areaInt function 130, 177, 204 ave function 131, 177, 204

B
Background 27 batch mode 221 bitmap (bmp) 23 Boundary object 105 boundary value only variables 155

C
Calculator 127 case sensitivity, in syntax 166 CCL (CFX Command Language) 163 names definition 166 overview 164 syntax 165 CEL (CFX Expression Language) 173 constants 181 functions 181 functions and constants 174 system variables 182 CFX Command Language 163 overview 164 Expression Language (CEL) 173 CFX-5 Definition File versions supported 10 CFX-5 Results File versions supported 10 cfx5post 226
CFX-5.5.1

CFX-Post introduction 2 Chart creating 95 viewing using the Command Line 207 Clip Plane creating 76 Colour 118 undefined 120 Command Editor 157 action commands 186 creating Session files 188 exporting data 200 file operations 188 function calculation 201 importing data from 197 loading a Results file 188 printing from 197 quantitative calculations 201 reading Session files 191 reading State files 194 Readstate option actions 195 saving State file 192 Command Line 7, 163 mode 221 object creation and deletion 172 comment character, in syntax 167 compressor performance macro 159 connectivity number 139 conservative variable values 153 constants 181 continuation character, in syntax 167 Contour Plot creating 68 control buttons, in Animation Editor 145 coordinate frame creating 72 corrected boundary node values 153 count function 132, 177, 204 Cp polar macro 161 Create Chart 95 Clip Plane 76 Contour Plot 68 Coordinate Frame 72 Index
Page i

CFX-Post

Index

2-CFX-Post

Instancing Transformation 86 Isosurface 58 Legend 91 menu 43 Plane 51 Point 46 Polyline 60 Streamline 79 Surface 63 Text 93 Vector 65 Volume 55 creating object using the Command Line 172

example 150 Expression Language 173

F
face angle Mesh Calculator Face Angle 138 File Export 17 Load Results 13 Load State 16 menu 9 operations, from the Command Editor 188 Print 22 Quit 24 Save State 14 types 10 force function 132, 177, 204 forceNorm function 133, 178, 204 function calculation using the Command Editor 201 functionality 2 functions and constants CEL 174

D
default objects 105 Definition File versions supported 10 deleting object using the Command Line 172 Double Buffering 27

E
edge length ratio 139 Edit menu 25 Options 27 Undo and Redo 27 element volume ratio Mesh Calculator Element Volume Ratio 139 Encapsulated PostScript (eps) 22 examples calculate area 203 load command 188 power syntax 212 readsession command 192 readstate command 196 savestate command 193 session command 190 exporting 17 data using the Command Editor 200 Expression Editor 149
Page ii

G
Geometry 116 global range 119 graphic objects 3 GUI (Graphical User Interface) appearance 31 introduction 4

H
heat transfer coefficient 155 hybrid variable values 153

I
importing data from the Command Editor 197
CFX-5.5.1

Index

CFX-Post

Index

2-CFX-Post

polyline data 198 surface data 199 Instancing Transformation creating 86 introduction functionality 2 graphic objects 3 the Command Line 7 the GUI (Graphical User Interface) 4 Isosurface creating 58

J
JPEG (jpg) 23

Edit 25 File 9 Session 37 Tools 113 Viewer 107 Mesh Calculator 138 connectivity number 139 Edge Length Ratio 139 mesh statistics Mesh Calculator Mesh Statistics 139 minVal function 135, 179, 205 Mouse Mapping 28 Move Light 30

L
Legend creating 91 length function 133, 178, 205 lengthAve function 134, 178, 205 lengthInt function 134, 179, 205 line interface mode 221 lists in syntax 168 load command examples 188 loading Results file 13 Results file from the Command Editor 188 State File 16 local range 119

N
named objects in syntax 167 New Session 39

O
Object Editor 116 Colour 118 Geometry 116 Render 121 Object Selector 115 Options appearance of the GUI 31 Background 27 Double Buffering 27 Edit menu 27 Mouse Mapping 28 Viewer 27 Overwrite when loading State files 16

M
Macro Calculator 158 compressor performance 159 Cp polar 161 massFlow function 134, 179, 205 massFlowAve function 134, 179, 205 massFlowInt function 135, 179, 205 maxVal function 135, 179, 205 menu Create 43
CFX-5.5.1

P
parameter values, in syntax 168 parameters, in syntax 168 Plane creating 51 Index
Page iii

CFX-Post

Index

2-CFX-Post

Play Session 39 PNG (Portable Network Graphics) 23 Point creating 46 Polyline creating 60 importing data for 198 Portable Network Graphics (PNG) 23 Portable Pixel Map (ppm) 23 PostScript (ps) 22 power syntax 209 examples 212 overview 210 subroutines 217 ppm (Portable Pixel Map) 23 printing 22 from the Command Editor 197 probe function 135, 180, 206 ps (PostScript) 22

Results File versions supported 10 Results file loading 13 loading from the Command Editor 188 Rotate 29 running in batch mode 221 in line interface mode 221

S
savestate command examples 193 saving Save State 14 State file using the Command Editor 192 seeds 65 Select Font Panel 31 Session files creating 188 reading 191 menu 37 New 39 Play 39 session command examples 190 Set Pivot 29 singleton objects 167 Start Recording 41 State File Append option 17 Load RES file option 16 loading 16 Overwrite option 16 reading 194 saving using the Command Editor 192 saving using the Save State form 14 Stop Recording 41 Streamline creating 79 subdomain
CFX-5.5.1

Q
quantitative calculations using the Command Editor 201 subroutines 217 quantitative functions 127 in the Macro Calculator 158 quitting from the file menu 24

R
range, global, local, user specified 119 reading State files using the Command Editor 194 readsession command examples 192 Readstate option actions 195 readstate command examples 196 Recording Start and Stop 41 Redo and Undo 27 Render 121
Page iv

Index

CFX-Post

Index

2-CFX-Post

object 105 subroutines 217 sum function 136, 180, 206 Surface creating 63 importing data for 199 syntax case sensitivity 166 continuation character 167 end of line comment character 167 indentation 167 lists 168 name objects 167 parameter values 168 parameters 168 simple details 166 singleton objects 167 system variables 182

U
undefined colour 120 values 120 Undo and Redo 27 user specified range 119

V
Variable Editor 151 example 152 variables boundary value only 155 hybrid and conservative values 153 Vector creating 65 Viewer 27, 124 menu 107 Virtual Reality Modelling Language (VRML) 23 Volume creating 55 volume function 136, 180, 206 volumeAve function 137, 180, 206 volumeInt function 137, 180, 206 VRML (Virtual Reality Modelling Language) 23

T
Text creating 93 thin surfaces default boundary objects 105 Timestep Selector 148 Tools Animation 141 Calculator 127 Command Editor 157 Expression Editor 149 Macro Calculator 158 menu 113 Mesh Calculator 138 Object Editor 116 Object Selector 115 Timestep Selector 148 Variable Editor 151 Viewer 124 torque function 136, 180, 206 Translate 29

W
wall heat flux 155 wall shear 155 Wireframe object 103 wrl (VRML file extension) 23

Y
Yplus 155

Z
Zoom 29

CFX-5.5.1

Index

Page v

CFX-Post

Index

2-CFX-Post

Page vi

Index

CFX-5.5.1